Marantz AV8003 User Manual

Download

AV Pre Tuner

AV8003

ENGLISHFRANÇAISDEUTSCHNEDERLANDSITALIANO

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

ITALIANO

WARRANTY

For warranty information, contact your local Marantz distributor.

RET AIN YOUR PURCHASE RECEIPT

Your purchase receipt is your permanent record of a valuable purchase. It should be kept in a safe place to be referred to as necessary for insurance purposes or when corresponding with Marantz.

IMPORTANT

When seeking warranty service, it is the responsibility of the consumer to establish proof and date of purchase. Your purchase receipt or invoice is adequate for such proof.

FOR U.K. ONLY

This undertaking is in addition to a consumer's statutory rights and does not affect those rights in any way.

FRANÇAIS

GARANTIE

Pour des informations sur la garantie, contacter le distributeur local Marantz.

CONSERVER L'ATTESTATION D'ACHAT

L'attestation d'achat est la preuve permanente d'un achat de valeur. La conserver en lieu sur pour s'y reporter aux ﬁ ns d'obtention d'une couverture d'assurance ou dans le cadre de correspondances avec Marantz.

IMPORTANT

Pour l'obtention d'un service couvert par la garantie, il incombe au client d'établir la preuve de l'achat et d'en corroborer la date. Le reçu ou la facture constituent des preuves sufﬁ santes.

GARANTIE

Bei Garantiefragen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Marantz-Händler.

HEBEN SIE IHRE QUITTING GUT AUF

Die Quittung dient Ihnen als bleibende Unterlage für Ihren wertvollen Einkauf Das Aufbewahren der Quittung ist wichtig, da die darin enthaltenen Angaben für Versicherungswecke oder bei Korrespondenz mit Marantz angeführt werden müssen.

WICHTIG!

Bei Garantiefragen muß der Kunde eine Kaufunterlage mit Kaufdatum vorlegen. Ihren Quittung oder Rechnung ist als Unterlage ausreichend.

NEDERLANDS

GARANTIE

Voor inlichtingen omtrent gar antie dient u zich tot uw plaatselijke Marantz.

UW KWIT ANTIE, KASSABON E.D. BEWAREN

Uw kwitantie, kassabon e.d. vormen uw bewijs van aankoop van een waarde v ol artikel en dienen op een veilige plaats bewaard te worden voor evt, verwijzing bijv, in v erbend met verzek ering of bij correspondentie met Marantz.

BELANGRIJK

Bij een evt, beroep op de garantie is het de verantwoordelijkheid van de consument een gedateerd bewijs van aankoop te tonen. Uw kassabon of factuurzijn voldoende bewijs .

GARANZIA

L’apparecchio è coperto da una garanzia di buon funzionamento della durata di un anno, o del periodo previsto dalla legge, a partire dalla data di acquisto comprovata da un documento attestante il nominativo del Rivenditore e la data di vendita. La garanzia sarà prestata con la sostituzione o la riparazione gratuita delle parti difettose. Non sono coperti da garanzia difetti derivanti da uso improprio, errata installazione, manutenzione effettuata da personale non autorizzato o, comunque, da circostanze che non possano riferirsi a difetti di funzionamento dell’apparecchio. Sono inoltre esclusi dalla garanzia gli interventi inerenti l’installazione e l’allacciamento agli impianti di alimentazione. Gli apparecchi verranno riparati presso i nostri Centri di Assistenza Autorizzati. Le spese ed i rischi di trasporto sono a carico del cliente. La casa costruttrice declina ogni responsabilità per danni diretti o indiretti provocati dalla inosservanza delle prescrizioni di installazione, uso e manutenzione dettagliate nel presente manuale o per guasti dovuti ad uso continuato a ﬁ ni professionali.

English

The AV8003 is in conformity with the EMC directive and low-voltage directive.

Français

Le AV8003 est conforme à la directive EMC et à la directive sur les basses tensions.

Deutsch

Das Modell AV8003 entspricht den EMC-Richtlinien und den Richtlinien für Niederspannungsgeräte.

Nederlands

De AV8003 voldoet aan de EMC eisen en de vereisten voor laag-voltage.

Italiano

Il AV8003 è conforme alle direttive CEE ed a quelle per i bassi voltaggi.

CE MARKING

English

WARNINGS

- Do not expose the equipment to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing.

- Do not remove the cover from the equipment.

- Do not insert anything into the equipment through the ventilation holes.

- Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.

- Do not cover the ventilation with any items such as tablecloths, newspapers, curtains, etc.

- No naked ﬂ ame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the equipment.

- When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

- Make a space of about 0.2 meter around the unit.

- No objects ﬁ lled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the equipment.

- When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from MAINS.

- The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.

- Do not touch hot spots during and immediately after use.

- During and immediately after use, this product is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

- Do not expose the unit to excessive heat such as direct sunlight, ﬁ re or the like.

Français

Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie, à l’humidité, à l’égouttement ou aux éclaboussures.

- Ne pas essayer de retirer le boîtier de l’appareil.

- Ne r ien insérer dans l’appareil par les oriﬁ ces de ventilation.

- Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées.

- Ne pas recouvrir les ouïes de ventilation avec un objet quelconque comme une nappe, un journal, un rideau, etc.

- Ne placer aucune source de ﬂ amme nue, comme une bougie allumée, sur l'appareil.

- Pour mettre au rebut les piles usées, respecter les lois gouvernementales ou les règlements ofﬁ ciels concernant l’environnement qui s'appliquent à votre pays ou région.

- Veiller à ce qu’aucun objet ne soit à moins de 0,2 mètre des côtés de l'appareil.

- Aucun objet rempli de liquide, un vase par e xemple, ne doit être placé sur l'appareil.

- Lorsque l'interrupteur est sur la position OFF, l'appareil n'est pas complètement déconnecté du SECTEUR (MAINS).

- L'appareil sera installé près de la source d'alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit facilement accessible.

- Ne pas toucher aux zones chaudes pendant et immédiatement après l’utilisation.

- Pendant l’utilisation et immediatement apres, cet appareil est chaud en dehors des commandes et des prises de raccordement arriere. Ne pas toucher aux zones chaudes, et particulièrement au panneau supérieur, pour éviter tout risque de brûlure.

- Ne pas exposer l’appareil à une chaleur excessive, comme celle des rayons directs du soleil, d’un f eu, etc.

AVERTISSEMENTS

Deutsch

WARNHINWEISE

- Das Gerät nicht Regen, Feuchtigkeit, Tropf- oder Spritzwasser aussetzen.

- Die Abdeckung nicht vom Gerät abnehmen.

- Keine Gegenstände durch die Belüftungsschlitze stecken.

- Das Netzkabel nicht mit feuchten oder nassen Händen anfassen.

- Decken Sie die Lüftungsöffnungen nicht mit einem Tischtuch, einer Zeitung, einem Vorhang usw. ab.

- Es dürfen keine Gegenstände mit offener Flamme, wie etwa brennende Kerzen, auf dem Gerät aufgestellt werden.

- Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung der verbrauchten Batterien alle geltenden lokalen und überregionalen Regelungen.

- Auf allen Geräteseiten muß ein Zwischenraum von ungefähr 0,2 meter vorhanden sein.

- Auf das Gerät dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllte Behälter, wie etwa eine Vase, gestellt werden.

- Wenn der Schalter ausgeschaltet ist (OFFPosition), ist das Gerät nicht vollständig vom Stromnetz (MAINS) abgetrennt.

- Das Gerät sollte in der Nähe einer Netzsteckdose aufgestellt werden, damit es leicht an das Stromnetz angeschlossen werden kann.

- Berühren Sie während oder unmittelbar nach dem Gebrauch keine heißen Stellen des Gerätes.

- Während oder unmittelbar nach dem Gebrauch ist dieses Produkt mit Ausnahme der Bedienelemente und der Anschlussbuchsen auf der Rückseite heiß. Berühren Sie die heißen Stellen und insbesondere die Oberseite nicht. Der Kontakt mit heißen Flächen kann zu Verbrennungen führen.

- Setzen Sie das Gerät keiner übermäßigen Wärme aus, z.B. durch Aufstellung in direkter Sonneneinstrahlung, in der Nähe eines offenen Feuers usw.

Nederlands

WAARSCHUWINGEN

- Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan regen, vocht, druppels of spetters.

- Verwijder de afdekplaat van het apparaat niet.

- Duw niets door de ventilatieopeningen in het apparaat.

- Raak het netsnoer niet met natte handen aan.

- Bedek de ventilatieopeningen niet met enige voorwerpen, zoals tafelkleden, kranten, gordijnen, enz.

- Plaats geen brandende voorwerpen, zoals kaarsen, op het apparaat.

- Volg bij het weggooien van v erbruikte batterijen de overheidswetgeving of milieuvoorschriften op die van kracht zijn in het land of de regio waarin u zich bevindt.

- Zorg dat er 0,2 meter vrije ruimte rond het toestel is.

- Plaats geen voorwerpen met een vloeistof erin, zoals een bloemenvaas, op het apparaat.

- Als de schakelaar op OFF staat, is het apparaat niet volledig losgekoppeld van de netspanning (MAINS).

- De apparatuur wordt in de buurt van het stopcontact geïnstalleerd, zodat dit altijd gemakkelijk toegankelijk is.

- Raak hete gedeelten van het apparaat niet aan tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik.

- Tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik is dit product heet, behalve in de omgeving van de bedieningstoetsen en de aansluitingen op het achterpaneel. Raak geen hete plekken aan, voor al niet het bovenpaneel. Contact met hete plekken kan brandwonden veroorzaken.

- Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan grote warmte, zoals direct zonlicht, vuur en dergelijke.

Italiano

AVVERTENZE

- Non esporre l’apparecchio alla pioggia, all’umidità, al gocciolamento o agli spruzzi.

- Non rimuovere il coperchio dell’apparecchio.

- Non introdurre oggetti all’interno dell’apparecchio attraverso i f ori di v entilazione .

- Non toccare il cavo di alimentazione con le mani bagnate.

- Non coprire le fessure di ventilazione con tovaglie, giornali, tende od oggetti analoghi.

- Non posare sull'apparecchio sorgenti di ﬁ amme scoperte quali candele accese.

- Smaltire le pile usate in conformità alle norme governative o disposizioni ambientali vigenti nel proprio paese o zona.

- Lasciare 0,2 metro liberi tutto intorno l'unità.

- Non mettere sull'apparecchiatura alcun contenitore di liquido, come ad esempio dei vasi.

- Quando l'interruttore è nella posizione OFF, l'apparecchiatura non è completamente scollegata da MAINS.

- L ’apparecchio va installato in prossimità della f onte di alimentazione, in modo che quest’ultima sia facilmente accessibile.

- Non toccare i punti caldi né durante, né immediatamente dopo l’uso.

- Durante, e subito dopo l’utilizzo, questo prodotto risulta essere molto caldo in alcune sue parti come ad esempio i connettori del pannello posteriore. Non toccare i punti caldi e specialmente la superﬁ cie del pannello. Il contatto con parti calde può provocare ustioni.

- Non esporre l’unità ad eccessivo calore come la luce diretta del sole, il fuoco o simili.

AV_070719N1

ENGLISH

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Marantz AV8003 A V Pre tuner. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide you with many years of home theater enjo yment. Please take a f ew minut es to read this manual thoroughly before you connect and operate the AV8003. As there are a number of connection and conﬁ guration options, you are encouraged to discuss your own particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V specialist dealer.

ACCESSORIES CHECK

Before use, check the below accessories were included in the package.

Remote Controller RC2001

Remote Controller RC101 for Zone

USB cable for RC2001

AC power cable

AV8003 User Guide

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING

This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. This product and the accessories packed together are the applicable product to the WEEE directive except batteries. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regulations. When discarding the unit, comply with your local rules or regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.

AAA-size Alkaline batteries × 4

AAA-size Dry batteries × 2

Microphone

AM Loop Antenna

FM Antenna

AV8003 NETWORK User Guide

Wizz.it3 User Guide

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ....................................1

ACCESSORIES CHECK ....................................................1

TABLE OF CONTENTS .........................2

CONNECTIONS SETUP

FEA TURES .............................................2

BEFORE USE .........................................3

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER ......................4

NAMES AND FUNCTION ......................5

FRONT PANEL ...................................................................5

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...........................................6

REAR PANEL .....................................................................7

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC2001 ....................................8

RC2001 LCD INDICATORS ...............................................8

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC101 ......................................9

BASIC

CONNECTIONS ...................................10

SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................10

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (BALANCED) ...............11

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (UNBALANCED) .......... 11

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ..........................12

ADVANCED

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ..........................13

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS ............................14

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS .........15

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS .................16

CONNECTING FOR THE ZONE .....................................17

REMOTE

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP

CONNECTION) ................................................................18

CONNECTIONS WITH NETWORK DEVICES ................19

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT .............................19

SETUP ..................................................20

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM .........................20

1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................22

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP ..........................................25

ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................28

3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................31

4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................33

5 PREFERENCE ............................................................34

6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................36

7 NETWORK SETUP ......................................................37

BASIC OPERATION ............................38

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...................................38

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ...........................38

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE .....................38

NIGHT MODE ...................................................................38

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................39

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................39

USING THE SLEEP TIMER .............................................39

M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander) ...................39

VIDEO CONVERT ............................................................39

CONPONENT I/P .............................................................40

HDMI RESOLUTION ........................................................40

SURROUND MODE .............................40

ADVANCED OPERATION ....................44

DISPLAY MODE ...............................................................44

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE .............................44

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUT ..............................................................................44

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

..15

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................45

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................45

7.1 CH INPUT ...................................................................45

AUX INPUT .......................................................................46

VIDEO ON/OFF ................................................................46

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ........................................46

LIP.SYNC ..........................................................................46

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY ...............................................46

TUNER OPERATION ...........................47

TO SELECTING THE TUNER .........................................47

LISTENING TO THE TUNER ...........................................47

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................48

RDS OPERATION ............................................................50

ZONE SYSTEM ....................................51

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT TERMINALS

CONTROLLING THE ZONE FUNCTION FROM

ANOTHER ROOM ............................................................52

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE SURROUND BACK

PREOUT TERMINALS .....................................................52

...39

.........................44

..51

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC2001 TO THE UNIT ..54

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................57

CONTROLLING ZONES USING THE RC2001 ..............65

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................67

MAIN MENU .....................................................................67

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT ....74

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................74

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................77

OTHER OPERATIONS.....................................................79

SETUP CODES (RC101) .................................................80

..54

TROUBLESHOOTING .........................82

HDMI .................................................................................83

OTHERS ...............................................84

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................84

DESCRIPTION .................................................................85

FEATURES

This unit incorporates the latest generation of digital surround sound decoding technology such as Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby ProLogic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-Logic IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music and Mono). Additionally , the unit is compatible with Dolb y TrueHD and DTS-HD (as used for Blu-ray and HD D VD discs) as well as Dolby Digital Plus, an expanded and improved version of Dolby Digital positioned as the next-generation delivery format. These audio formats can be sent with video signals via an HDMI cable to HDMI 1.3a-compatible equipment. In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-232C communication port, the unit is tomorrow’s technology, today!

• THX ultra 2 certiﬁ ed

This unit incorporates the most advanced Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a 192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of the 7 channels. Independent power supply circuits are incorporated for the FL display, audio and video sections for maximum separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected customized components, all elements work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the artist had intended.

This unit is designed and engineered with extensive feedback from custom installation experts, dealers and consumers. It features zone/multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C communication port, Flasher input and an extensive array of both analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable digital inputs, 4 component inputs, Super Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs, video convert system and OSD output versatility is taken to a stunning new level. Fur thermore, the unit can output the OSD information through the Y/C (Svideo) and composite video outputs.

An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote controller allows full access to all of the operating functions and can be used for system operation as well.

The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of the unit, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed. This unit is here to perform in your unrivaled home entertainment setup.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

• HDMI

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) is an enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting audio signals in addition to video signals. Where multiple cables were previously needed for audio/ video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a single cable. The HDMI input jacks of this unit support HDMI Ver.

1.3a. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter support HDMI V er. 1.3a.

This unit supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection technology that consists of data encoding and other device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital video content. Both this unit and the connected component (such as a video player or monitor) must support HDCP. Before connecting a component to this unit, refer to its instruction manual.

• x.v.Color

• Deep Color 36bit

• THX / THX Surround EX

• Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus, dts HD

• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)

• Dolby Headphone

• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)

• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)

• HDCD

• Balanced Preout Terminal

• Balanced CD/CDR input terminal

• Bi-amp Pre out

• Source/Pure Direct mode

• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ

• DSD to PCM converter

• Audyssey MultEQ

• M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets

• Auto Adjust Function for Speak er Distance Settings (Delay Time)

• Assignable DC Trigger Output

• Assignable Video Input

• Auto Lipsync (Audio Delay)

• Massive Energy P ower Supply

• Troidal Core Transformer

• Function Rename

• 192 kHz/24 bit DA C for all 8 Channels

• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets

• Auto Input Signal Detection

• Zone B output

• Up-scaling to full HD HDMI out from analog video (480i/480p/576i/576p)

• Video Off Mode

•

Set Up Menu via all Video Output (Composite, S-Video, Component video and HDMI)

• Video convert system

HDMI ← Component Video ↔ S-Video ↔ Composit Video

• Two component monitor outputs

• Video I/P Converter

• Selectable Zone Component Video output

• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System Control

• Emitter Output

• Programmable, learning remote controller

• Customize RC2001 by using Wizz.it3 software

• Flasher Input

• IR Recever Input

• Allows playback of music, photos, and movies stored on a network device.

BEFORE USE

This section must be read before any connection is made to the mains supply.

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING

Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply with the household power and safety requirements that exist in your area. AV8003 can be po w ered by 230V AC only.

Recording and playback of any material may require consent. For further information refer to the following:

— Copyright Act 1956 — Dramatic and Musical Perf ormers Act 1958 — Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 —

Any subsequent statutory enactments and orders

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES

To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the unit where:

• Exposed to direct sunlight.

• Near to sources of heat such as heaters.

• Highly humid or poorly ventilated.

• Dusty.

• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.

•

On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable surfaces

• Radiated heat is blocked such as in cramped audio racks.

• Make a space of about 0.2 meter around the unit.

To ensure proper heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from walls and other equipment.

Above

0.2 m (8 inchs)

Left

0.2 m (8 inchs) or more

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

or more

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

Right

0.2 m (8 inchs) or more

Rear

0.2 m (8 inchs) or more

KEEP OBJECTS OFF

Keep objects off the unit. Bloc king the vent can result in accident and damage.

DO NOT TOUCH HOT SPOTS DURING AND IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE

During and immediately after use, the unit is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

Opening and closing the front panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. K eep the door closed when not using these controls.

Caution:

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the door and the panel.

ENGLISH

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER

REMOTE CONTROL

Operate the remote controller within a distance of approx. 5m from the infr ared receptor windo w on the front of the unit.

Approx. 5 m

60°

Remote controller

Caution:

• Do not allow direct sunlight, an inverter ﬂ uorescent light or other strong source of light to shine onto the unit’s infrared receptor window. Otherwise, the operation of the remote controller may be disabled.

• Bear in mind that operating the remote controller may cause other devices operated b y infrared ra ys to be operated by mistake.

• The remote controller cannot be operated if the space between the controller and the unit’s infrared receptor window is obstructed.

• Do not place any objects on top of the remote controller.

Doing so may cause one or more buttons to be

held down which will cause the batteries to run down.

LOADING BATTERIES

Before using the remote controller for the ﬁ rst time, load the batteries in the remote controller. The batteries provided are used to verify the operations of the remote controller only.

Remo ve the back cover.

2. Inser t the new alkaline batteries (AAA type) with correct ª and · polarity.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

Rechargeable batteries can also be used. In this

case, be sure to use only AAA type NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) rechargeable batteries. When using rechargeable batteries, be sure to follow manufacturer guidelines for safety and proper usage.

• When the batteries are almost worn out, “LOW” is displayed on the LCD battery indicator.

• The settings remain saved in the remote controller even if the power completely runs out. However, the time setting will be lost, and so please set the time setting again.

<RC101>

1. Remo ve the battery cover.

2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct

ª and · polarity.

CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES

• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote controller.

• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.

• If the remote controller does not operate from close to the unit, replace the batteries with new ones, even if less then a y ear has passed.

• The included battery is only for verifying operation. Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.

• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in the proper direction, following the + and - marks in the remote controller’s battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or battery ﬂ uid leakage:

- Do not use a new battery with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not shor t-circuit, disassemble, heat or

dispose of batteries in ﬂ ames.

• Remove the batteries when not planning to use the remote controller for a long period of time.

• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the ﬂ uid from the inside of the battery compartment, then insert new batteries.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

Notes:

• Under normal usage, alkaline batteries last approximately 3 months.

The battery life varies depending on the frequency

of use and the remote controller settings. F requent use will wear down the batteries quicker.

Note:

• The life of the batteries used with the remote controller is about 4 months with normal use.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRE CT

POWER ON/ OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

NAMES AND FUNCTION

FRONT PANEL

q tyu i o !0 !1 !3!4r!2 !5ew

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

q POWER switc h and STANDBY

indicator

Press the button to turn the power ON, and press again to turn it OFF. If the POWER switch is in the ON position, the power of this unit can be turned ON/OFF by pressing the POWER button on the remote controller. When this unit is in the standby mode with the

POWER switch set to the ON position, pressing the ENTER button also allows to turn the power on.

The STANDBY indicator lights up when this unit is the standby mode (power OFF) by the remote controller.

w INPUT SELECTOR knob

(AUDIO/ VIDEO)

This knob is used to select the input sources. (See page 38)

e SURROUND MODE button

Press this button to select the surround mode.

r AUTO (Auto surround) button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the surround modes. When this mode is selected, the unit determines the surround mode corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MO DE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

ENTER

PURE DIRECT button and indicator

DISPLAY

M-DAX

!7!8@0@1@3 !9@2

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed again,

“PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL display indication goes out. In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Notes:

• The surround mode is automatically switched to AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed automatically as follows.

Front SPKR = LARGE Center SPKR = LARGE Surround SPKR = LARGE Surround Back SPKR = LARGE Sub woofer = YES

y ZONE button

Press this button to activate the Zone system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display. (See page 51)

u ZONE SPEAKER button

Press this button to activate the Zone Speaker system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.

(See page 52)

i MENU button

Press this button to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.

o EXIT button

Press this button to exit from the SETUP MAIN MENU.

!0 BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM and AM in the TUNER mode.

!1 T-MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode. (See page 48)

INFRARED receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote controller.

!3 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory numbers or station names. (See page 48)

!4 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 49)

!5 VOLUME contr ol knob

This knob is used to adjust the overall sound level. Tur ning the control clockwise increases the sound level.

!6 DISPLAY button

Press this button to change the FL display mode.

!7 M-DAX button

Press this button to select M-DAX processing for input source. (See page 39)

TOP button

Press this button to return to the top screen of the main menu when configuring setup items. (See page 20) Also, press this button to return to the top screen of the network when using the network.

Cursor (

Press these buttons to operate the SETUP MAIN MENU, NETWORK and TUNER function.

5, ∞, 2, 3

) / ENTER button

@0 7.1CH INPUT button

Press this button to select the output of an external multichannel player.

@1 MIC jack

Automatically measure speaker characteristics using the included microphone. (See page 26)

@2 THX button

Press this button to select THX processing for input source.

HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

M-DAX

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER

SURR

¡9 ¡7 ¡5™0 ¡6

CONNECTIONS

M-DAX

™1

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST V – OFF NIGHT PEAK ANALOG SLEEP

AUTO

a DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

SETUP

display off mode.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer function in the main-zone is in use.

OPERATION

BASIC

d MULTI (Zone system) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the zone system is active.

f AUTO SURR

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO SURROUND mode is in use.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the TUNED : This indicator illuminates when the

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

TROUBLESHOOTING

DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)

These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).

tuner’s Auto mode is in use. tuner receives a sufﬁ ciently strong

radio signal. FM station is being tuned into stereo

condition.

j V (video)-OFF mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF function is active.

OTHERS

k NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of digital program material at low volume levels.

h k l ¡1 ¡3f

j ¡0

DISC 6.1 DIRECT MTX 6.1

¡8

ATT

¡2

DIGITAL

PCM

¡4d

SURROUND

DIGITAL

L C R

LFE

SL S SR

l PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable lev el of internal processing, this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press the ATT button. (See page 55)

¡0 EQ indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is selected to “AUDDYSSEY”, “FRONT” or “FLAT”.

¡1 ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation function is active.

¡2 DIGITAL Input Indicator

This indicator is illuminated when a digital input has been selected.

¡3 ANALOG input indicator

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input source has been selected.

¡4 SIGNAL FORMAT indicators

2 DIGITAL This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital signal is input.

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is input.

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal is input.

96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal is input.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is PCM (pulse code modulation).

2 SURROUND

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround signal is input.

¡5 HDMI indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDMI device is connected to the unit.

¡6

ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators

These indicators display the channels that are encoded with a digital input signal. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 7.1 channel PCM-audio. “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “ SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX ﬂ ag or DTS-ES, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.

Note:

When the unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD, the input signal status displayed depends on the number of channels of the speakers used. If a 7.1-channel signal is supplied for a 5.1-channel speaker system (L/C/R/SL/SR/SW), the “S” indicator is not illuminated.

¡7 HDCD indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDCD signal is decoded from digital input signal.

¡8 Main Information Display

This display shows messages relating to the status, input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or other aspects of unit’s operation.

¡9 DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the SOURCE DIRECT mode. PURE DIRECT mode or

7.1ch input mode.

™0 M-DAX indicator

This indicator illuminates when this unit is in the MDAX mode.

™1 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode.

ENGLISH

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

RLL

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

REAR PANEL

q w t y

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

7575Ω

GND

@4 @3

ANTENNA

(

INPUT 1

(

)

(

)

DVD

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

COMPONENT

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

ININOUT

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

q FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial cable, or a cable network FM source.

AM antenna and ground terminals

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the best reception.

w COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/

OUTPUT

If your DVD player or other device has component video connectors, be sure to connect them to these component video connectors on the unit. This unit has 4 component video input connectors to obtain the color information (Y, C recorded DVD signal or other video component and two component video outputs connector to output it directly into the matrix decoder of the display device. By sending the pure DVD component video signal directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing that normally would degrade the image. The result is vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like colors and crisp detail. The Monitor Out 2 terminal is also used for ZONE output.

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

MAIN

OUT

DC OUT

REMOTE

OUT

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

, CR) directly from the

S-VIDEO

y BALANCED PREOUT (L, R,SL, SR,

SBL, SBR, C)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL

(Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals

!3 BALANCED CD/CDR IN

Connect to the balanced output terminal of a Super Audio CD Player or similar player. The UNBALANCED CD/CDR input terminals are the CD/CDR IN terminals in @1.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

to the balanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

)

(

CD/CDR

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

)

RECEIVER

ININOUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

ININOUT

EMITTER

OUT

(

AUX

(

)

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

)

OUT PUT

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

12312

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

SRSRSL

SBR

UNBALANCED

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

3123

SBL

3123123123

SBR

RS-232C

AC IN

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

COLD

NETWORK

u NETWORK

hub.

Connect to a network device such as a router or

)

(

This allows you to play back music, photos, and movie ﬁ les stored on a connected network device.

i Subwoofer Output

These are subwoofer outputs and each one includes both unbalanced and balanced jack conﬁ gulations. Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered subwoofer .

Note:

Do not connect to the BALANCED and UNBALANCED terminals at the same time.

!4 7.1 CHANNEL or AUX INPUT

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD multichannel player, or other components that has a multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.

!5 EMITTER OUT

The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals are output to this terminal. External devices can be controlled by connecting them to this terminal.

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

o SPEAKER C switch

e!8

i!1!4!9@0

o!0!3 !2!5!6!7

e Zone Outputs

(Audio output A/B, Video)

These are the audio and video output jacks for the Multi zone. Connect these jacks to optional audio power ampliﬁ ers or video display devices to listen and view the source selected by the zone system in a remote room.

r MONITOR OUT

These are monitor outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. When connecting two video monitors or televisions, be aware that the OSD interface can be used with both MONITOR OUT connections.

t UNBALANCED PREOUT

(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals to the unbalanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this unit or set to OFF for normal connection (surround back and zone speakers). (See page 18)

!0 RS-232C

The RS-232C port is to be used in connection with an external controller to control the operation of the unit by using an external device. The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to update the operating software of the unit so that it will be able to support new digital audio formats and the like as they are introduced.

!1 AC INLET

Plug the supplied power cable into this AC INLET and then into the power outlet on the wall. This unit can be powered by 230V AC only.

!2 CD/CDR Input Selection Switch

Switches between BALANCED and UNBALANCED for the CD/CDR IN terminals.

Notes:

• Always set the input selection before turning on the power. Equipment failure may result If the input selection is switched while the power is on.

• Audio may not be output from the main unit if the input to the unit differs from the setting of the Input Selection Switch.

!6 IR RECEIVER IN

Connect to an external IR receiver.

FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)

These terminals are to control the unit from each zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

!8 DC TRIGGER output terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…) Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the conditions by which these jack will be active. (See page 35)

Note:

• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

ZONE REMOTE IN/OUT terminals

IN: Connect to a zone remote control device,

available from y our Mar antz dealer.

OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped

with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi zone.

@0 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with remote control (RC-5) terminals.

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

@1 AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1,

DSS/VCR2, T APE, CD/CDR)

These are the analog audio inputs and outputs. There are 6 audio inputs and 4 audio outputs. The audio jacks are nominally labeled for cassette tape

decks, compact disc play ers, DVD pla yers and etc....

The audio inputs and outputs require RCA-type

CONNECTIONS

connectors.

@2 DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /

OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)

These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical jacks.

SETUP

The inputs accept digital audio signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital source component. For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1 optical output. The digital outputs can be connected to MD recorders, CD recorders, or other similar components.

OPERATION

BASIC

VIDEO IN/OUT (TV, DVD , VCR1, DSS/VCR2)

These are the video inputs and outputs. There are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and

OPERATION

ADVANCED

other video components to the video inputs. The 2 video output channels can be used to be connected to video tape recorders for making recordings.

@4 HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT

CONTROLLER

This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 2 HDMI output. The

REMOTE

input function can be selected from the OSD menu system. (See page 23)

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC2001

The provided remote controller is a universal remote controller. The POWER button, numeric buttons and control buttons are used in common across different input source components. You can use the Wizz.it3 editing software to select your fav orite settings for the buttons and pages of the remote controller.

z POWER ON and OFF b uttons

These buttons are used when controlling devices that have been set with separately powered on and off remote commands.

x SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used when controlling devices that have been set with a single power on/off remote command.

RC2001 LCD INDICATORS

x c

c LCD Display

Remote controller display

v Programmable soft buttons

These buttons are used by the Wizz.it 3 editor software to make LCD display and button operation settings. These buttons are also used to adjust the number of pages for each device.

m ,

b Page Scroll buttons

These buttons are used when scrolling pages in Home mode and the device modes.

n Home button

This button is used to select Home mode. To select a device that will be controlled, ﬁ rst select Home mode, then select the device.

m Light button

This button is used to turn on the backlight for the buttons and LCD .

, Cursor , ENTER buttons

A Mode display area

Home:

This is displayed during Home mode.

Device Name:

This displays the device mode name that is currently active. This area is always highlighted.

B Command display area

This displays the information that has been set for the display items in the device modes.

C Battery indicator

This displays the remaining battery power.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

⁄0

. Programmable Hard b uttons

These buttons are used by the Wizz.it 3 editor software to make the remote controller command settings for learning and macro operations.

⁄0 USB port

This port is used to connect the remote controller and a PC with the supplied USB cable to enable editing with the Wizz.it 3 editor software.

D Sub info. Area

Normal operation:

The page number that has been set for the respective mode is displayed.

When sending IR command:

The command name that has been set for the respective button is highlighted.

Operation when not sending an IR command (such as jump operation):

The operation name that has been set for the button is displayed normally (not highlighted).

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC101

The included remote controller can be used in zone systems. Using this remote controller, you can operate the unit through infrared receivers or the infrared receptor of Marantz products in multiple ZONEs. The SOURCE ON/OFF button and control buttons are used in common across different input source components. The input source controlled with the remote controller changes when one of the input selector buttons is pressed.

⁄7 ⁄6

⁄5 ⁄4

v b n

⁄3 ⁄2

⁄0 ⁄1

z POWER ON and OFF b uttons

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the ZONE control or zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the unit in main zone.

x SOURCE ON and OFF buttons

These buttons are used to turn on or off a speciﬁ c source (such as a DVD player) independently from the rest of the system.

(When NETWORK mode (AUX2) is selected)

SOURCE ON button

This button is used to select the screen resolution.

SOURCE OFF button

This button is used to return to the previous screen.

c AMP - SOURCE /Numeric buttons SOURCE buttons

These buttons are used to switch the source of the unit. Each time a source button is pressed, the remote control changes to the source which was pressed. This remote controller can control 12 types of equipment. To change the unit source, press this button twice within two seconds. The signal is sent when it is pressed the second time.

Notes:

• Press AUX2 to switch to NETWORK function.

• The T2 button is not used for this unit.

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the zone/zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the unit in main zone.

Numeric buttons

Use these buttons only for preset setting.

v AMP - VOL +/- buttons

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the zone control or zone speaker.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the unit in main zone.

b AMP - MUTE button

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

This button is used to mute the audio for the zone control or zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to mute the audio for the unit in main zone.

n 3, 4, 1, 2 (CURSOR) / ENTER

buttons

These buttons are used when operating cursor of a source.

(When Tuner mode (T1) is selected)

PRESET +/ PRESET - buttons

Used to select a preset station up and down.

TUNE 3 /TUNE 4 buttons

Used to tune a frequency station up and down.

m SLEEP button

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of zone control mode.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of the unit receiver in main zone.

, CONTROL buttons

These buttons are used when operating PLA Y, STOP, PAUSE and other commands of a source.

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

P.SCAN button

Used to start preset scan.

CLEAR button

Used to stop preset scan.

. A/B/C/D buttons

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select the band of tuner (AM/FM).

Note:

The C (XM) and D (DAB) button are not used for this unit.

(When the other source is selected)

Reserve key for the learning commands.

⁄0 SET button

This button is used to enter learn mode, preset mode and clone mode.

⁄1 ZONE button

This button is used to set the zone area.

• Zone A

• Zone B

• Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

• Zone D (MAIN ZONE)

⁄2 DISC+/T.MODE

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

(When CD/DVD/CDR mode is selected)

Used to change the disc for the CD/DVD/CDR changer.

⁄3 INFO button

(When Zone A mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for selected zone control of the unit is displayed on the TV monitor.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for the unit are displayed on the TV monitor.

⁄4 MENU/INPUT button

(When DVD mode is selected)

Used to menu command.

(When TV mode is selected)

Used to select the TV video input.

⁄5 CH 3/4 buttons

These buttons are used to change channels in TV mode and DSS mode.

⁄6 SEND indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is transmitting a signal.

⁄7 LEARN indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is in the LEARN mode.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,

CONNECTIONS

a center speaker, surround left and right speakers, a surround back left and right speakers, and a subwoofer . For best results we recommend that all front speakers be of the same type, with identical or similar driver units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front sound stage as the action moves from side to side. Your center channel speaker is very important as over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture

SETUP

emanates from the center channel. It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not be identical to the front channel speakers, but they should be of high quality. The surround center speaker is useful for playback

OPERATION

of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of

BASIC

the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that surround channels are discrete full range, while they were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type systems. Bass effects are an important part of home theater. For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used

OPERATION

ADVANCED

as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If you have full range front speakers, however, they may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the switches in the menu system.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

Subwoofer

Front Right

Front Center

Front Left

Front left and right speakers

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

Center speaker

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little backward from the line.

Surround left and right speakers

When this unit is used in surround operation, the preferred location for surround speakers is on the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Surround back left and right speakers

Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1channel system is installed. Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Subwoofer

We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum bass effect. As the subwoofer only handle lo w frequency . You can place it any where in the room.

Surround Right

Surround Left

Surround Back Right

Surround Back Left

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the three front speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

Surround left and right speakers, and surround back speaker

Place the surround left, right and surround back speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m. Also place the speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

70cm 1m

Note:

• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left, right and the center speakers when the speakers are installed near the TV.

ENGLISH

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

( 1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

( 3

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

DC CONTROL

FLASHER

REMOTE CONTROL

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

OUT

OUTININ

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCEDBALANCED

UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

( 1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

( 3

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

DC CONTROL

FLASHER

REMOTE CONTROL

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

OUT

OUTININ

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

SBR

SBL

UNBALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCEDBALANCED

UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (BALANCED)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals to the balanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the SW jack to connect a powered subwoof er (po w er ampliﬁ er built in ).

AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

NETWORK

MM8003

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

VCR1

VIDEO

ININININOUT

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

CHANNEL 8

(

OPTION

UNBALANCED

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

CHANNEL 7

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

)

BALANCED

PUSH

COMPONENT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

CHANNEL 6 (

SBR

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CHANNEL 5 (

)

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

OUTPUT 1

DVD

)

FLASHER

OUT

CHANNEL 4

(

BALANCED

PUSH

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

CHANNEL 3

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

(

)

VCR1

)

DSS/VCR2

(

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

CD/CDR

UNBALANCED

(

AUX

DSS/VCR2 ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

(

)

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

CHANNEL 2

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

OUT PUT

MONI. OUT

3123

SBL

SBR

CHANNEL 1

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

SELECTOR

7.1CH

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

GND HOT

COLD

CONNECTION

SBL

RS-232C

FLASHER

(+)

(

)

3123

LLSRSRSL

3123123123

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

AC IN

MODEL NO. AV8003

OUT

DC CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL

ONONOFF

SWSWC

AC IN

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

OPTION

)

SBR

SBL

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

(

)

Powered

Subwoofer

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (UNBALANCED)

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the SW jack to connect a powered subwoof er (po w er ampliﬁ er built in ).

AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

NETWORK

MM8003

Powered

Subwoofer

VIDEO

(

OPTION

CHANNEL 8

(

CHANNEL 8

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

(

OPTION

)

(

7575Ω

INPUT 1

554

DIGITAL IN

)

(

)

(

INPUT 1

)

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

DVD

VCR1

ININININOUT

33221

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

CHANNEL 7

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

COMPONENT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

CHANNEL 6

(

SBR

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CHANNEL 5 (

)

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

OUTPUT 1

DVD

)

FLASHER

OUT

CHANNEL 4

(

BALANCED

PUSH

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

CHANNEL 3

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

(

)

VCR1

)

DSS/VCR2

(

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

CD/CDR

UNBALANCED

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

(

)

AUX

UNBALANCED

(

)

RRL

CHANNEL 2

(

)

BALANCED

PUSH

OUT PUT

MONI. OUT

3123

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH

SBR

CHANNEL 1

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

(+)

)

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

(+)

GND HOT

)

(

COLD

CONNECTION

3123

SBL

3123123123

SBR

RS-232C

AC IN

OUT

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

OUT

REMOTE CONTROL

AC IN

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

(

)

(

)

SBR

(

)

(

)

SBL

(

)

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

(

)

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

MODEL NO. MM8003

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

( 1

)

OMONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

(

AUX

)

OPT.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

CD/CDR

SBR

SBL

BSBR

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

AC IN

OUT

OUTININ

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

ZONE

OUT

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

( 1

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

UNBALANCED

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SELECTOR

CD/CDR IN

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

CD/CDR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

NAMES AND

ABOUT BALANCED JACKS

FUNCTION

• The balanced output connector uses a XLR connector.

• The XLR connector for professional use is internally wired in either of the following two systems.

1. European system

CONNECTIONS

(Pin w = HOT, Pin e = COLD)

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

CD recorder

ANALOG

INPUT

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

LRL

OUTPUT

Analog Audio

L R

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

Super Audio CD

BALANCED UNBALANCED

Analog Audio (balanced)

Analog Audio (unbalanced)

L R

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

w q

HOT

GND

COLD

2. USA system (Pin w = COLD, Pin e = HOT)

COLD

w q

GND

HOT

• This unit uses the 1. European system.

When a preamp or main ampliﬁ er adopting the

European system is connected using a cable with XLR balanced connectors, the reproduced signal may be inverted of phase.

R LR L

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

(

)

(

)

DVD

VCR1

VIDEO

ININININOUT

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

VCR1

DVD

The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal which is currently selected.

Caution:

• Do not connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed.

Notes:

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables this will result in generating a hum or other noise.

(

OUT

)

DIGITAL OUT

R L

(

)

(

INPUT 1

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

)

DVD

DSS/VCR2

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

COAX.

OPT.

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

INPUT 2

DVD

DSS

VCR1

ININOUT

AAB

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

EMITTER

OUT

)

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED I

PUSH PUSH

(

)

AUX

(

)

RRL

MONI.

323

SBL

SBR

(

)

NPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

OUT

COAX.

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

OUT

UNBALANCED BALANCED

COMPONENT

SELECTOR

(

)

INPUT 4

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

DSS/VCR2

(

)

DVD

(

)

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

RECEIVER

FLASHER

CD/CDR

ZONE OUT

CD/CDR

OUT

R LR L

(

)

(

INPUT 1

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

CD/CDR

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

(

)

AUX

(

)

CD/CDR IN

RRL

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

MONI. OUT

3123

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH

SBR

R L

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

(+)

)

(

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SBL

AC IN

SELECTOR

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and 3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital source components.

• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks can be connected to a CD recorder, or a MD deck inputs, respectively.

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or

Notes:

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently. Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are output through the corresponding digital and analog jacks, respectively.

other digital source’s connected to digital input jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3 input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/ output jacks according to your component. See page 23.

ENGLISH

RSR

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSW

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

VMODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

OUT

AUDIO

VCR1

DVD

(

)

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT PUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

VIDEO

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

AUNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH

(

AUX

)

OPT.

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SELECTOR

(

)

AUDIO

DSS/VCR2

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

DVD player

DIGITAL

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

L R

VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y C

/ PB CR

/ PR

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

PROJECTOR

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Y C

/ PB CR

/ PR

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL

OUT

Satellite Tuner

AUDIO

OUT

L R

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.

VIDEO jack

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the conventional composite video signal.

S-VIDEO jack

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO signals enables high-quality color reproduction.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

Connect the S-VIDEO output jack on your video

L R

component to the S-VIDEO input jack on this unit.

Component jack

Make component video connections to a TV or

CONNECTIONS

monitor with component inputs to produce higher

L R

(

)

(

VCR1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

INPUT 2

)

INPUT 4

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

(

)

FLASHER

CD/CDR

OUT

S-VIDEO

)

DVD

(

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

)

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

(

)

AUX

(

)

(

)

RRL

MONI. OUT

OUT PUT

SBR

UNB

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

(

)

COLD

12312

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

Video

S-Video

Analog Audio

L R

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

)

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

COMPONENT

INPUT 3

VIDEO

(

OUT

MAIN

OUT

(

)

VCR1

)

MONITOR

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE

VIDEO

INPUT 4

AUDIO

TAPE

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

(

DSS/VCR2

ZONE OUT

OUT

(

)

(

)

(

VCR1

DC OUT

S-VIDEO

)

(

CD/CDR

)

INPUT 2

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

(

)

DVD

(

)

(

)

DSS

VCR2

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

OUT

PUT

OUT PUT

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

12312

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

GND

(+)

HOT

(

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

UNBALANCED

)

SBL

RS-232C

3123

3123123

SBR

AC IN

PRE OUT

LLS

SBL

BALANCED

SPEAKER C

MODEL NO. A

ONONOFF

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

DVD

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

(

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

VCR1

33221

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

OUT

INPUT 1

(

)

(

)

VIDEO

L R

AUDIO

S-VIDEO OUT IN

OUT

L R

VIDEO

OUT

INPUT 1

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

INPUT 1

(

)

(

DVD

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

L R L R L R

L L R R

AUDIO

OUT

L R

COMPONENT

(

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

)

(

)

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

ININOUT

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

AUDIO

L R

VIDEO

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN

VCR

quality video images. Use a component video cable or 3 video cords to connect the component video out jacks on the unit to the monitor.

Notes:

Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels

• properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are the for L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the video signals properly.

•

If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to the S-VIDEO or component jack on this unit, it is not necessary to connect the conventional video signal to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video inputs, this unit gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and SVIDEO jacks or component are output to the corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO or component jacks, respectively.

•

his unit

has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically , by sensing the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output format of your DVD player, or other digital source components. Refer to the instructions of the each component connected to the digital input jacks.

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator with a Dolby Digital decoder to connect the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the DVD player to the digital input jack on this unit.

• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals of this unit can output the same video signal. Moreover, the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the unit can output video signals for zone playback. (See page 33)

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

SWCC

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

HDMI JACK

This unit has four HDMI inputs and two HDMI output. It can send digital video and audio signals from DVDs and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes

CONNECTIONS

signal degradation caused by analog conversion so that high quality images can be enjoyed. This unit is also capable of converting analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video) for HDMI output. Select an input source from the OSD menu system. (See page 23)

SETUP

Notes:

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to connect to a display that supports HDCP.

OPERATION

• There may be no image output if connected to a TV or display that is not compatible with the above

BASIC

format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display to be connected to the unit for detailed information regarding the HDMI terminal.

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the HDMI jack on the unit with the HDMI jack on a DVD player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player must support multichannel audio transmission through

CONTROLLER

its HDMI jack.

REMOTE

HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI terminal, connect the audio signal separately .

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:

OTHERS

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the HDMI cable, but this unit cannot control other components this way.

• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector, etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio are not output.

DVD player VIDEO PROJECTOR

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set top box do not support HDMI repeater operations like those of the unit. In such case, pictures are not

HDMI OUTPUT HDMI INPUT

properly projected on monitors such as TVs and projectors.

• When multiple components are connected to this unit, turn power to unused components off to prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing. These types of disks are not played back correctly unless the left, center, right and surround left and right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.

• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1 or later is connected to the unit, multi channel PCM playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio disks.

• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support HDMI 1.2 or later is connected to the unit, DSD playback is not possible even with Super Audio CD.

(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

INPUT 1

(

)

(

)

DVD

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

COMPONENT

(

VIDEO

)

(

)

(

)

INPUT 3

INPUT 2

DVD

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

ININOUT

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

INPUT 2

DVD

)

VCR1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

)

(

CD/CDR

)

INPUT 4

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

(

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

OUT PUT

)

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1 2

12312

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

SRSRSL

SBR

UNBALANCED

GND

(+)

HOT

(

)

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

3123

SBL

3123123123

SBR

RS-232C

AC IN

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

NETWORK

(+)

(

)

• The following functions are not available when the unit is connected to equipment that does not support HDMI 1.3a.

SATELLITE TUNER

• Deep Color

• x.v.Color

• Auto Lipsync

HDMI OUTPUT

• Bitstream audio signal decoding, as for Dolby

Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, and so on

For details, refer to the user’s manuals of connected

equipment.

• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output is connected to the unit, a separate audio cable (opticaldigital, coaxial digital or analog) is needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP”. (See page 23)

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 64 kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

ENGLISH

SBR

SBL

OUT PUT

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

(

DSS/VCR2

)

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

CRS-232C

AAC IN

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

LETAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

UNBALANCED

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SELECTOR

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

UOUT UPUT

UOUT UPUT 22

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

TMONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

SSW

(

AUX

)

OPT.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

OUT

MAIN

REMOTE

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

REMOTE CONTROL

OUTININ

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS

(

)

T 1

INPUT 2

DVD Audio play er

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

L R

FRONT SURR.

R L R L R L

SURR. BACK

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

(

)

INPUT 4

T 3

VCR1

(

)

OUTPUT 1

DSS/VCR2

ONE

DVD

(

)

OUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

FLASHER

CD/CDR

OUT

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

(

)

(

VCR1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

INPUT 2

)

INPUT 4

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

(

)

FLASHER

CD/CDR

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

)

DVD

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

(

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

O P

)

MONI. OU

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

12312

SBL

SBR

RC OUT

CONNECTIONS

OPTION

SETUP

DVD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

REMOTE CONTROL

OUT

CD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

BASIC

OPERATION

INPUT 1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

(

)

RECEIVER

ININOUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

EMITTER

OUT

RRSR

(

AUX

(

)

MONI. OUT

PUSH PUSH

SBL

SBR

)

OUT PUT

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

12312

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

7.1CH

SBR

(+)

(

UNBALANCED

)

SBL

RS-232

R L R L R L

OUT

REMOTE CONTROL

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

DVD

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

)

INPUT 2

DVD

)

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

ININININOUT

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

MAIN

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

MM8003

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel player, DVD audio player or external decoder. If you use these jacks, s witch on the 7.1CH INPUT and set the 7.1CH INPUT le v el b y using the SETUP MAIN MENU. See page 23.

You can control other Marantz products through this unit with the remote controller by connecting the REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit. The signal transmitted from the remote controller

Whenever e xternal infrared sensors or similar devices are connected to RC-5 IN of the unit, be sure to always disable operation of the infr ared sensor on the unit by using the following procedure.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

is received by the remote sensor on this unit. Then the signal is sent to the connected device through this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote control only at the unit. Also, if a Marantz power ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch. To make REMOTE CONTROL connections with an MM8003, set P.AMPLINK to ENABLE. To make REMOTE CONTROL connections with another power amp, set P.AMPLINK to DISABLE. (See page

34) Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the back of

other units (not the AV8003) to “EXT.” (EXTERNAL) to use this feature.

1. Hold down the ZONE button and the MENU button on the front panel at the same time for ﬁ ve seconds.

The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL

DISPLAY.

Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

Press the ENTER button. Once this setting

is made, the infrared sensor on the unit is disabled.

Note:

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected. Otherwise, the unit will be unable to receive remote control commands.

To restore the or iginal setting, perform steps 1

to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

SWCC

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

))

GNDGND AMAM

ANTENNAANTENNA

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS

FM Antenna

FM External

CONNECTIONS

(

)

(

)

7575Ω

GND

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

ANTENNA

INPUT 1

(

)

DVD

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

COMPONENT

(

)

33221

VIDEO

)

(

)

INPUT 3

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

ININOUT

COAX.

OPT.

MAIN

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

Antenna

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

(

)

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

AM Loop Antenna

(

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

DSS/VCR2

ZONE

OUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

OUT

)

(

)

CD/CDR

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

(

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

OUT PUT

)

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

12312

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH IN

SBR

SRSRSL

SBR

GND

(+)

HOT

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

UNBALANCED

)

(

SBL

RS-232C

AC IN

AM External

Antenna

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

3123

3123123123

SBR

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

COLD

NETWORK

(

)

Connecting the supplied FM antenna

The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only. During use, extend the antenna and move it in v arious directions until the clearest signal is received. Fix it with push pins or similar implements in the position that will cause the least amount of distortion. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna

The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use only. Set it in the direction and position it to where you

receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables, and power cords. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna

terminal.

2. Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal. Release the lever.

Note:

• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the AM antenna GND terminal.

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

REMOTE

2. Bend the base part in the reverse direction.

3. Inser t the hook at the bottom of the loop part into the slot at the base part.

4. Place the antenna on stable surface.

CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

Notes:

• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon signs, busy roads, etc.).

• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it well away from power lines, transformers, etc.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is stretched horizontally above a window or outside.

Notes:

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

ENGLISH

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

( 2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

( 2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

( 3

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

DC CONTROL

FLASHER

REMOTE CONTROL

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

OUT

OUTININ

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

RECEIVER

SBR

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SBL

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

ZONE OUT

OUT

ZONE

REMOTE

ZONE

OUT

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

CONNECTING FOR THE ZONE

As shown in the diagram, a play er connected to this unit in another ZONE can be used to play music and movies when used in combination with an amp from Marantz or other manufacturer.

FUNCTION

If Surround back speakers or SPEAKER C are not being used, the Surround Back Preout terminals can be used for the ZONE SPEAKER terminals.

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

VCR1

VIDEO

ININININOUT

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

VCR1

)

DSS/VCR2

(

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

CD/CDR

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DVD

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

FLASHER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

OUT

AAB

L R LR

(

DSS/VCR2

AUX

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

(

)

MONI. OUT

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

OUT PUT

3123

SBL

SBR

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

7.1CH IN

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

(

)

3123

SBL

3123123123

3123

SBR

PRE OUT

AC IN

LLSRSRSL

LLR

SBL

BALANCED

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

NETWORK

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

UNBALANCED

CHANNEL 8

(

OPTION

RIGHT

SPEAKER

BALANCED

PUSH

)

(+)

)

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 7

(

)

(

)

(

SBR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 6

(

SBR

)

(

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 5

(

SBL

)

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 4

(

)

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 3

(

)

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 2

(

)

LEFT SPEAKER

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 1

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

GND HOT

COLD

CONNECTION

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

(+)

)

(

OUT

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL

BALANCED CABLE

AC IN

UNBALANCED CABLE

MODEL NO. MM8003

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

IR RECEIVER

ZONE B

R L

FRONT

ZONE RIGHT

SPEAKER

IR RECEIVER

ZONE LEFT

SPEAKER

REMOTE

RC OUT

R L

VIDEO

MONITOR

L R

FRONTRC IN

MAIN AMP (For zone)

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

ZONE A

OTHERS

NAMES AND

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

(

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

NETWORK

AC IN

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

(

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

COAX.

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININININ

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VCR1

DVD

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

DC CONTROL

FLASHER

REMOTE CONTROL

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

OUT

OUTININ

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

SBL

)

(

SBR

)

(

)

(

OPTION

)

PRE OUT

SBR

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FUNCTION

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION)

A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that hav e tw o sets of inputs (for treble and bass). This allows you to drive the treble and bass units with separate channel amps , which enables better sound quality .

Connect the speakers as shown in the ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to ON.

CONNECTIONS

Notes:

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

ENGLISH

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the unit will trip and set the unit to standby. (The STANDBY indicator will ﬂ ash.) In such case, recheck the connections between the speakers and the unit.

• Turn power to the unit off before changing the setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

(

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

)

VCR1

)

DSS/VCR2

(

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

CD/CDR

(

AUX

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

(

)

MONI. OUT

PUSH PUSH

RRL

)

OUT PUT

3123

SELECTOR

SBL

7.1CH

SBR

CONNECTION

GND

HOT

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

(+)

)

(

3123

SBL

3123

3123123123

SBR

RS-232C

AC IN

LLR

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

NETWORK

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 7

(

)

SBR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 6

(

)

SBR

(

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 5

(

SBL

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 4

(

)

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 3

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 2

(

)

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 1

(

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

GND HOT

COLD

CONNECTION

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

OUT

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL

(+)

)

(

AC IN

MODEL NO. MM8003

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

INPUT 1

(

)

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

VCR1

VIDEO

ININININOUT

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

BALANCED CABLE

UNBALANCED CABLE

OTHERS

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT SPEAKER

ENGLISH

SBR

SBL

SBLSWSW

SBR

OUT PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

VIDEO

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

AC IN

OUT

OUTIN

MONITOR

OUT

(

)

ZONE

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

MAIN

ZONE

REMOTE

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUTININ

OUT

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SBR

SBL

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

S-VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

SELECTOR

RS-232C

FLASHER

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

NETWORK

BALANCEDUNBALANCED

SPEAKER C

OFF

PRE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

NETWORK

CONNECTIONS WITH NETWORK DEVICES

As shown in the diagram, music, images, and movie ﬁ les stored on a networ k device can be played by connecting to a network device such as a router or a hub. Use a LAN cable when connecting a network device to the NETWORK terminal of this unit. For settings necessary to use the network and method of operation, see the NETWORK User Guide.

Computer

Windows Media Player 11 or server software that supports DLNA

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

COLD

NETWORK

)

(

3123

3123123123

SBR

Note:

• The unit's network connector supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. Use a 100BASE-TX connection to ensure smooth playback.

• Use a straight LAN cable that is category 5 or higher.

• If there are not enough LAN connectors, add a hub (purchase separately) to the router.

• The term network device refers to the following devices.

– Hard disk with a built-in DLNA server function (LAN connection type) – HDD recorder or audio system that supports DLNA – A computer can be used when either of the following server software programs is installed.

• Windows Media Player 11

• Server software that supports DLNA

Network HDD that

supports DLNA

Router

LAN

WAN

HDD recorder that supports

DLNA

Straight LAN cable (purchase separately)

Modem

Straight LAN cable (purchase separately)

To the Internet

connection

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

(

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

)

OUTPUT 1

(

)

CD/CDR

(

INPUT 4

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

ININOUT

RECEIVER

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

(

)

AUX

(

)

MONI. OUT

SBL

SBR

MPONENT

INPUT 3

/VCR2

S/VCR2

INPUT 1

REMOTE

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

OUT

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

(

OUT

MAIN

OUT

g s f d

a RS232C

Connect an external control device or other device f or servicing. (Use a straight cable f or the connection.)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the unit by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V 44mA max).

d EMITTER OUT

Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER OUT terminal.

f FLASHER IN

This unit can be controlled by connecting a control box or other control device to this unit.

OUT PUT

SBR

UNBALANCED

CONNECTION

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

COLD

12312

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

7.1CH IN

12312

SBL

12312312

SBR

RS-232C

AC IN

PRE OUT

g IR RECEIVER IN

This unit can be operated by remote controller without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting an external IR receiver.

GND

+12V

An IR receiver is connected as shown above.

Caution:

• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the unit, therefore do not do this.

• 50 mA of current are supplied to the device connected to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.

• Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA of current to this unit will damage this unit. Before using other devices, carefully check the speciﬁ cations of those devices.

SBL

BALANCED

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

Signal

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAK ER

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

ENTER

SETUP MIC

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

SETUP

After all components are connected, initial setup must be performed.

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM

CONNECTIONS

This unit incorporates an onscreen menu system, which makes various operations possible by using the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and ENTER buttons on the remote controller or on the front panel.

Note:

•

To view the onscreen displays, make certain you

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel to the composite, S-Video, component video or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page 13, 14)

1. Press the HOME button on the remote controller. (This step is not needed when operating the setup menus from the unit.)

Press the MENU button on the remote controller

or press the MENU button on the front panel. The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system is displayed.

There are 7 items in the MAIN MENU.

Select the desired sub-menu with the

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. The display will change to the selected submenu.

Notes:

• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set

it to UNLOCKED.

• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-7 on the MAIN

MENU to “LOCKED”.

(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the

MAIN MENU.

(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1

or 2 cursor buttons.

3 or

RC2001 BUTTON CONTROL

ENTER button

LEFT button

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

AV8003 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

LEFT button

HOME button

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN b utton

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

UP button

EXIT button

T-M OD E

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

M-DAX

TOP button

Pressing this button while making setup settings returns to the top screen of the OSD menu.

SETUP MIC

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

ZONE

THX

ENTER

BAND

EXIT

TOP

To exit from OSD menu system, press the

RIGHT button

EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the

OTHERS

unit or the remote controller.

DOWN b utton

ENTER button

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

• Press the TOP button on this unit to return to the top

screen of the main menu while setting setup items.

MAIN MENU

1.INPUT SETUP

2.SPKR SETUP

3.SURR SETUP LOCKED

4.VIDEO SETUP

5.PREFERENCE UNLOCK

6.ACOUSTIC EQ

7.NETWORK

7.NETWORK SETUP

VIDEO :PAL

RESOLUTION :AUTO

SCREEN SAVER:ON

ENGLISH

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 22)

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 25)

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 31)

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV-AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE CONPONENT I/P:DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 HDMI ASPECT :THROUGH HDMI OUT1 RES:AUTO HDMI OUT2 RES:AUTO COMP OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 33)

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“7. NETWORK SETUP” (P. 37)

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : ECONOMY AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 34)

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“6. A COUSTIC EQ” (P. 36)

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output of connected audio devices and the input jacks of this unit.

CONNECTIONS

•

FUNC INPUT SETUP :

“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 23)

•

7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 23)

•

FUNC RENAME :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 24)

SETUP

Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with 3

4 cursor button, and press the

ENTER button.

1.INPUT SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired sub-menu with the cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.

3 or

P. 23

☞

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1 DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:AUTO - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX :AUTO - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 23

☞

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 24

☞

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP (ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The 6 digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to the preferred source. Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are to be assigned to which input source.

Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1 DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

2. Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and assign a mode and input jack (DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).

MODE

AUTO:

Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the digital input signal condition. If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog signal present, the analog signal will be played. "AUT O" is the initial setting of all input sources.

HDMI:

Select “HDMI” used

DIG:

Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be used.

ANA:

Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used.

DIG

The 6 digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. Assign the number of a digital input jack to the device.

, when only a HDMI signal will be

4 cursor

COMP

Assign the number of a component video input jack to the device.

V/S

Assign the number of a composite video and Svideo input jack to the device.

Note:

• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when assigning to input functions.

Press the ENTER button.

Select each mode setting and input ter minal

with the 1

Press the ENTER button.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this por tion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and then press the

ENTER button to go to the next page.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from

the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4,

1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽ mark.

2 cursor buttons.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:AUTO - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX :AUTO - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1channel input sources. Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level.

1. Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3

buttons.

Using the 1

video input source to be played through the MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔ NET

↔ T APE ↔ CD/R ↔ AUX ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...

Notes:

•

When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was activated.

• When MONITOR OUT jack.

2 cursor buttons, select the

2 cursor buttons as follows;

“

V-OFF

” is selected,

no signal is emitted from

4 cursor

Select desired channel with the 3

buttons.

Using the 1

volume level of each channel.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and +12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.

2 cursor buttons, adjust the

4 cursor

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the device.

Note:

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to THROUGH, audio is not output from the unit. (See page 34)

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION

Input sources can be registered under any name. This menu is for renaming input source. This menu is for renaming function name. Names can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces. (Characters are selected from those appearing on

CONNECTIONS

the display.) This name appears on the unit's FL display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the OSD Setup menu.

Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.

INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4 cursor

Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.

BACK:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the “RENAME” area one character at a time.

DEFAULT:

Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the name in the “FUNCTION” area.

SPACE:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “RENAME” area.

Note:

• RENAME cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go

to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.

2. Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 buttons.

Select an input source with the 1

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

buttons.

Select “RENAME” with the 3

buttons.

Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to

change with the 1

Move the cursor to the character list with the 4

cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A” to begin with.)

TROUBLESHOOTING

Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the selected

letter.

OTHERS

2 cursor buttons.

4 cursor

2 cursor

ENGLISH

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP

After you have installed the unit connected all the components and determined the speaker layout, it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for your environment and speaker la yout. Before you perform the following settings, it is important that you first determine the following characteristics:

•

AUT O SETUP:

“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”

(see page 26)

•

MANUAL SETUP:

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP”

•

THX AUDIO SETUP:

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP”

Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER button.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

(see page 29)

(see page 30)

P. 26

☞

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:- 1st MIC POSITION NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

P. 29

☞

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : YES SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : MIX

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

P. 30

☞

THX AUDIO SETUP

BOUNDARY GAIN COMP. THX ULTRA2 SUB-W:YES B.G.C. :ON

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

RETURN EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons, and press the ENTER button.

After you complete this the portion of the setup,

press the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor button. The cursor will move to “RETURN” and press the ENTER button to go to the Sub-menu.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : MANUAL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

NAMES AND

2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)

FUNCTION

The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of the unit measures sound characteristics of the speaker system and room where the unit is used and automatically optimizes settings.

CONNECTIONS

The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by this unit provides the best listening environment for multiple listeners. To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6 listening positions, using the supplied microphone. The measurement results are analyzed using an original algorithm and environmental settings are made to improve the sound characteristics of the

SETUP

listening area. To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker distance, etc.) without using the AUT O SETUP feature , see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 29 of the manual.

HOW TO PERFORM AUT O SETUP

OPERATION

During measurement, the OSD menu displays the

BASIC

condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.

Connect the speakers, power amp of a MM8003

or other amp to this unit and place the speakers in suitable locations.

Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

jack on the unit.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Set the microphone in the listening position.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

Notes:

• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6 listening positions.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in the

main listening position.

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at ear height in the listening position.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and microphone.

• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the volume to the middle point and set the crossover frequency to the highest.

• During measurement, step away from the microphone and operate the unit via the remote controller from a

1 st Position Check

During the ﬁ rst position check, the following

screen is displayed as the unit checks background noise in the listening room, presence of speakers, and speaker polarity and measures the acoustical characteristics in the ﬁ rst position where the microphone is set up.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:- 1st MIC POSITION NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

position that is out of the path of the speaker sound.

• The test tone output from the speakers during measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and

EXIT

watch out for small children.

Note:

Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU, select “AUTO SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to display the start screen.

• The detection check measures the state of use of all speakers whether actually used or not.

For example, if the center speaker is not used, the

test tone will require time to go from the L-channel to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug

Select the number of channels for the surround

back speaker you are using.

For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select

“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use speaker C or zone speaker, select “NON”. See

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

page 18, 35.)

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the ENTER button to start measurement.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

the microphone or operate this unit during this time.

When the 1 st Position Check ends, the

following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

Here, to view the results of the detection check,

After confirming the check results, select

“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the OSD menu.

At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto

Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Note:

• AUTO SETUP is not available in Pure Direct, Source Direct, or 7.1 Channel Input modes.

Move the microphone to the second listening

position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to measure the second point. At this point, you can cancel second point measurement and calculate measurement results by selecting “CALCULATE” and pressing the ENTER button.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

Repeat steps 7 until measuring 6 points

between the main listening position and surrounding positions.

When all measurements end, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

CALCULATE

select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

RETURN EXIT

and press the ENTER button. The results will be displayed.

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

EXIT

Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button to calculate measurement results. During calculations, the following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

If the check results indicate an error , take suitable

action with that item and remeasure. (For error messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on page 28.)

EXIT

ENGLISH

Note:

• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order to obtain the best results.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends on the number of connected speakers and measured listening positions. The more speakers and listening positions, the more time is needed.

Checking Measurement Results

10.

When calculations for the measurement results

end, a screen appears for confirming the calculation results.

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button to enter them.

Note:

To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page

37.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN NEXT

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from

speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN NEXT

* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to

[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons. Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] (meters).

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size and

crossover frequency

SPEAKER SIZE

FRONT L : AUTO CENTER : AUTO FRONT R : AUTO SURR.R : AUTO SURR.B R : AUTO SURR.B L : AUTO SURR.L : AUTO

RETURN NEXT

CROSSOVER FREQ

FRONT : AUTO CENTER : AUTO SURR : AUTO SURR.B : AUTO

RETURN

* AUT O is displayed to indicate that the speak er size

and crossover frequency results were automatically measured.

Storing Measurement Results in Memory

11.

Once finished confir ming the measurement

results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to display the CHECK RESULT screen.

CHANNEL LEVEL

FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : -6.5dB FRONT R : -1.5dB SURR.R : +1.0dB SURR.B R : +9.5dB SURR.B L : +12.0dB SURR.L : -2.5dB SUB W : -12.5dB

RETURN NEXT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Place the cursor on “STORE” and press

the ENTER button to store all parameters including the equalizer parameters in memory. If not wanting to store the calculation results in memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press the ENTER button.

Note:

Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all measurement results and calculation results, therefore operate the remote controller with care.

When storing operations end, the following OSD appears on the display.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Notes:

• Do not turn the power to the unit off while storing parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the unit’s memory and may damage the unit.

• Please set any THX Certiﬁ ed speakers manually to “Small” and the crossover “80 Hz” after Auto setup operation.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

ERROR MESSAGES

MIC SET ERROR!!

CONNECTIONS

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

MIC SET ERROR!!

RETURN EXIT

• Check the microphone connection.

NOISE ERROR!!

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

ANALYZE ERROR!!

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor

REMOTE

buttons and press the ENTER button. A detail screen like the following appears on the display.

TROUBLESHOOTING

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

NOISE ERROR !!

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

ANALYZE ERROR !!

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT L : YES REV CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES REV SURR.R : NON ERR SURR.B R : YES ERR SURR.B L : YES ERR SURR.L : NON ERR SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• The speakers required for suitab le playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and r ight channels of the front speakers is backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but the surround back speaker is connected

(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and

surround back speakers.)

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-

channel.)

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity

([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly

connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)

• Check speaker direction and la yout

OTHERS

ENGLISH

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

1. Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU.

Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : YES SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : MIX

RETURN NEXT EXIT

When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, use the guidelines below . LARGE:

The complete frequency range for the channel you are setting will be output from the speaker.

SMALL:

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from the subwoofer . If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will be output from both the left and right speakers.

Select each speaker with the 3

buttons.

Set the size of each speaker with the 1

cursor buttons.

After you complete this por tion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button

to go to the next page.

THX SPKR

If you are using a full THX speak er systems which are approved by THX Ltd:

• The front, center and surround speaker size

should be “SMALL”.

• The subwoofer should be “YES”.

• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be

“80Hz”.

You need to set the number of surround back speakers be “SMALL”.

and the surround back speaker size should

4 cursor

Note:

• When making settings for all channels manually, set THX SPKR to “NO.”

SUB W

YES:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

NO:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

FRONT

LARGE:

Select if the front speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the front speakers are small.

• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed at “LARGE”.

CENTER

NONE:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

LARGE:

Select if the center speaker is large.

SMALL:

Select if the center speaker is small.

SURR.

NONE:

Select if no surround left and right speakers are connected.

LARGE:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are small.

SURR. B

NONE:

Select if no surround back left and right speakers are connected.

1CH:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected. In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.

2CH:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers are connected.

ZSP A:

Select if using the SURROUND BACK output terminal as Zone Speaker A.

ZSP B:

Select if using the SURROUND BACK output terminal as Zone Speaker B.

Notes:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed to “NONE.”

SURR. BACK SIZE

LARGE:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer , y ou can select the cutoff frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of the small speakers connected. 60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz → 160Hz → 180Hz

Note:

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly lower frequency.

BASS MIX

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE” is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set f or the subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “BOTH” is selected, the lo w frequencies will be played through the main L&R speakers and the subwoofer .

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but depending on the size and shape of the room, interference may result in a decrease of the actual volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play through the main L&R only. This selection is preferred by THX.

Note:

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 2

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to

go to the next page.

3, 4, 1 and

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

Use this menu to specify the distance of each speaker’s position from the listening position. The delay time is automatically calculated according to these distances. Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly used seating position in the room. This is important for the timing of the acoustics to create the proper sound space that the unit and today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note:

• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,

the speaker conﬁ guration sub-menu will not appear here. (There are several useful books and special DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper home theater conﬁ guration. If you are unsure, have your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you. They are trained professionals familiar with even the most sophisticated custom installations. recommends the www.cedia.org website for further information.)

Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT

with the 1

Select each speaker with the 3

buttons.

Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1

10.

FRONT L:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your normal listening position.

CENTER:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your normal listening position.

FRONT R:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. L:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. R:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your normal listening position.

2 cursor buttons.

Marantz

4 cursor

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

SUB W:

FUNCTION

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your normal listening position.

SURR. B L:

Set the distance from the surround back left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. B R:

CONNECTIONS

Set the distance from the surround back right speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes:

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet (ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps

SETUP

(The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears if it is set, two surround back speakers in the

OPERATION

BASIC

SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

11.

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and

OPERATION

ADVANCED

2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the next page.

SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : MANUAL

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

Here you can set the volume for each speak er so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.

OTHERS

Note:

FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1 Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source Direct mode.

TEST MODE:

Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the test tone with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →

Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments

for each channel. Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the same level f or all the speakers.

If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of each speaker as listed below.

Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the

12.

4 cursor button. This unit will emit a pink noise from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any level

between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

This unit will now emit the pink noise from the

center speaker.

Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

13.

volume level of the noise from the center speaker so that it is the same level as the front left speaker.

Press the 4 cursor button again. This unit will

14.

now emit the pink noise from the front right speaker.

Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and

15.

other speakers until all speakers are adjusted to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”. Press the ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Notes:

• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.

• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub menu. (See page 23)

• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP

You can set the advanced Speaker Array.

Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

THX AUDIO SETUP

BOUNDARY GAIN COMP. THX ULTRA2 SUB-W:YES B.G.C. :ON

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

Boundary Gain Compensation

THX UL TRA2 SUB-W : YES or NO

If you have a THX Ultra2 certiﬁ ed subwoofer (or other subwoofer with ﬂ at anechoic response to 20Hz), select “YES”. If set to “YES”, you can chose to activate B.G.C. (Boundary Gain Compensation). If set to “NO”, Boundary Gain Compensation may not be activated and the feature is locked out.

B.G.C.: ON or OFF

Set to ON when you feel too much bass is being output.

OFF: Boundary Gain Compensation is not applied. ON: Boundary Gain Compensation is applied.

Notes:

• If you set

SUB W = NO

in SPEAKER SIZE menu, Boundary Gain Compensation will not be activated. THX UL TRA2 SUB-W also cannot be set.

• If you set

THX ULTRA2 SUB-W = YES

Peak Level setting is not applied.

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART

The best ASA effect is when the surround back speakers are together and facing forward. If the distance between the surround back speakers is,

• Less than 30 cm (12 in.): TOGETHER

• Greater than 30 cm (12 in.), and less than 48 in. (122 cm): CLOSE

• Greater than 122 cm (48 in.): APART

, the Bass

Speaker type and positioning

This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1 channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During system setup, select the distance between surround back speakers.

Front-L Center Front-R

Surround-L Surround-R

Surround A

Surround Back

SBL SBR

Surround B

Surround A

Di-polar Radiating Speaker

Direct Radiating Speaker

Notes:

• The Advanced Speaker Array setting cannot be made when using the Zone Speaker function or when ON is set for SPEAKER C on the rear panel of this unit.

• If you set SURR.B = NONE, 1CH, ZSP A or ZSP B in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array will not be activated.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press ENTER button to go to the 2. SPKR SETUP menu.

ENGLISH

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters for the various surround input signals so as to bring out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

•

CHANNEL LEVEL:

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL”

•

x MUSIC PARAMETER:

“3-2 PLII x MUSIC PARAMETER”

•

CSII PARAMETER:

“3-3 CSII PARAMETER”

•

NEO:6 PARAMETER:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER”

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU with the 3 the ENTER button.

Select the desired menu with the 3

buttons and press the ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

RE-EQ:

Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off. Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1 or 2 cursor button to activate it.

LFE LEVEL:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal. Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor button.

M-DAX:

Select the desired M-DAX mode. Select “HIGH”, “LOW” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor button. (See page 39)

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• Some settings cannot be made depending on Pure Direct, Source Direct, and the selected surround mode.

(see page 31)

(see page 32)

4 cursor buttons and press

4 cursor

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 31

☞

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

P. 32

☞

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 32

☞

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 32

☞

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER button.

Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Set the SURR. MODE with the 1

buttons.

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

4. Select the desired menu item with the 3 cursor buttons, set the desired level with the

2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER

button.

SURROUND MODE:

The surround mode can be independently set for 3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

CENTER LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 le vel interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back

speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

2 cursor

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

SUB W LEVEL:

FUNCTION

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

Note:

CONNECTIONS

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or CSI I will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2 MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the 3. SURR SETUP menu.

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources such as CDs. In this mode, this unit includes three controls to ﬁ netune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU with

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

Select “PLIIx MUSIC P ARAMETER” with the 3

4 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PARAMETER:

Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three parameters as listed below .

PANORAMA:

Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” o r “ OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION:

Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3 le vel in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor b uttons. Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or towards the rear. This can be useful to help achieve a more suitable balance from all the speakers with certain recordings.

CENTER WIDTH:

Set the CENTER WIDTH lev el between 0 and 7 in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor b uttons. Center width allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right speakers. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend for the front image. If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

3-3 CSII PARAMETER

1. Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN MENU with the 3 the ENTER button.

Select “CS II PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

TRUBASS:

Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level increments with the TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS DIALOG:

Set the SRS DIALOG level between increments This can be popped out of the surround audio effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what the actors say. If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

4 cursor buttons and press

1 or 2

cursor buttons.

0 and 6

in 1-

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1 channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also supports 5.1 channel input.) This mode expands the sound image from the center channel.

Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3

the ENTER button.

Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Notes:

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music mode.

• If “ NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is disabled.

4 cursor buttons and press

increments

with the 1

2 cursor

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV-AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE CONPONENT I/P:DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 HDMI ASPECT :THROUGH HDMI OUT1 RES:AUTO HDMI OUT2 RES:AUTO COMP OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button.

•

VIDEO CONVERT

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. This section explains how to set up conversion for each type of video input.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button.

VIDEO CONVERT

TV : ANA&HDMI DVD : ANA&HDMI VCR1 : ANA&HDMI DSS : ANA&HDMI TAPE : ANA&HDMI CD/R : ANA&HDMI AUX : ANA&HDMI

RETURN EXIT

Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons

ANA&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot downconvert from HDMI digital video signals to analog video signals.)

ANA ONLY:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). It does not up-convert to HDMI.

OFF:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note:

• For details on video convert feature, see page 39.

•

TV-AUTO

Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to page 46)

•

OSD INFO

Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “ENABLE”, this unit will display the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire this information, select “DISABLE”.

Note:

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD information is output if the Video Convert function is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 39.

•

COMPONENT I/P

Set whether or not to convert 480i/576i signals to 480p/576p signals when outputting the analog video input signal input from the COMPOSITE terminals, S-VIDEO terminals, or COMPONENT terminals. Select “ENABLE” or “DISABLE. ”

DISABLE: Do not convert ENABLE: Convert

Note:

This setting is enabled only when VIDEO CONVERT is set to other than OFF.

•

HDMI OUT

This setting is for selecting which output terminal, OUTPUT1 or OUTPUT2, to output the signal to. Select the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

To use the remote controller (RC2001) to change the HDMI OUT setting, press the HOME button, then the AMP button, and press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. After HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 is displayed on the remote controller , press the HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 button to switch between them.

•

HDMI ASPECT

Set HDMI ASPECT in accordance with the screen size of the television connected to this unit. Select 16:9NORM or THROUGH using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

THROUGH:

Output is in the same screen size as the input.

16:9 NORM:

Output includes black bands on the left and right of the television screen.

Notes:

• This setting is enabled only when a 480i/576i signal is input and HDMI RESOLUTION is set to other than THROUGH, or when a 480p/576p signal is input.

• The aspect ratio cannot be changed when the input video signal is 720p or 1080i.

• This setting depends on network settings when a network is selected.

•

HDMI OUT 1 RES

HDMI OUT 2 RES

Selects the resolution of the video signal output from the HDMI terminal of this unit. Select from the following using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

THROUGH ↔ 480/576p ↔ 720p ↔ 1080i ↔ 1080p ↔ AUTO ↔ THROUGH

ENGLISH

AUTO:

Sets an appropriate resolution for a television that is connected using HDMI. (If connected by converting to DVI, the output is 480p/576p)

THROUGH:

The output is same resolution as that input.

480p/576p:

The output is 480p/576p.

720p:

The output is 720p.

1080i:

The output is 1080i.

1080p:

The output is 1080p.

Notes:

• The resolution cannot be changed when the input video signal is 720p or 1080i.

• The resolution depends on the network settings when a network is selected.

• Signals are not output when connected to a monitor that does not support HDCP.

•

COMP OUT 2

This setting is for selecting whether to output the images for the main zone or the images for the zone system to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output destination between MAIN and ZONE A with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

Note:

• When ZONE A is selected, video signals converted from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not output.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

5 PREFERENCE

•

ZONE SETUP :

“5-1 ZONE SETUP”

•

DC TRIGGER SETUP :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP”

CONNECTIONS

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER button.

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : ECONOMY

SETUP

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

OPERATION

BASIC

AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

buttons and press the ENTER button.

ST AND BY:

When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce the power consumption when the unit is in the Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected, “TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the

OPERATION

unit is in the Standby mode.

ADVANCED

AUDIO:

In the Audio mode, Dolby Digital and DTS output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select “AUDIO” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

CONTROLLER

HDMI AUDIO:

REMOTE

This setting determines whether to play back audio input to the HDMI jacks through the unit or output it through the unit to a TV or projector. ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks

can be played back b y this unit.

TROUBLESHOOTING

In such case, audio signals are not output to the TV or projector.

THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is

not output from the speaker terminals of the unit. Audio data is output directly to the TV or projector. This setting is used to listen to audio on a multi channel TV, etc.

(see page 35)

4 cursor

HDMI LIP (Auto Lipsync Correction):

Video signals may take longer to process than audio signals depending on the connected video equipment. When the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI

1.3a, audio and video can be automatically synchronized using this function. Use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE. ENABLE: Auto Lipsync Correction is used to

synchronize audio and video.

DIESABLE: Deactivates this function.

Note:

• This function is not available when the unit is connected to equipment that does not support HDMI

1.3a or Auto Lipsync Correction. For details, check the user’s manual of the connected equipment.

• If this function is unavailable, you can use the regular Lipsync function to synchronize audio and video. (See page 46)

P.AMP LINK:

ENABLE: Set when performing REMOTE

CONTROL connection with MM8003.

DISABLE: Set when performing REMOTE

CONTROL connection with a MARANTZ power amp other than MM8003.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button.

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : ECONOMY AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-2:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

ZONE SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

ZONE SETUP B

AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO

ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

OTHERS

ENGLISH

5-1 ZONE SETUP

The AV8003 has source selectors, sleep timers and zonespeaker output remote controller for the two other ZONEs in the zone system. These features can be set from this menu.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Select “ZONE SETUP” with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons and select either “ZONE A” or “ZONE B” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

The following explanation shows how to operate ZONE A of the zone system. The ZONE B setting does not have the VIDEO FUNCTION.

ZONE SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

Select the desired item with the 3

button.

VIDEO:

Select the video source of the zone output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

AUDIO:

Select the audio source of the zone output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SLEEP:

The sleep mode is available when the zone is active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons . The sleep timer can be set to a maximum 120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

MONO/ST:

This mode switches audio output to the zone system between MONAURAL and STEREO, using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

4 cursor

OSD INFO:

With this function, on-screen display information is shown on connected TVs or other devices when you switch input functions. Select “ENABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to enable OSD INFO or “DISABLE” to disable it. Select “DISABLE” if this function is not needed.

ZONE:

Switch the zone output “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SPKR (ZONE SPEAKER):

Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

VOL (VOLUME SETUP):

Select whether the zone or zone speaker output level is variable or ﬁ xed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):

Adjust the zone output level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The volume can be set between -90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Note:

• SPKR setting can be changed when the SURR B is

set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and “SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is displayed.

• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the zone output

level cannot be adjusted from the A or B ZONE.

• SPKR cannot be on for both ZONE A and ZONE B at the same time. After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can be used to link with input functions for the main zone or zone. Each trigger can be setup separately.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3 ENTER button.

Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the

3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

4. You can select “MAIN ZONE”, “ZONE A”, “ZONE B”, “REMOTE”

Note:

• REMOTE is available for the external control. The RC2001 cannot operate the function.

5. Select desired input source with the 3 cursor buttons.

Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1

buttons.

After you complete this por tion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 cursor button and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• When an input source that is on in the set ZONE is selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER output terminal.

4 cursor buttons and press the

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“DISABLE” with the

2 cursor buttons.

2 cursor

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and changing the Equalizer mode.

• PRESET G. EQ ADJ : “6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ”

CONNECTIONS

(see page 37)

• CHECK AUT O 1 & 2 : “6-2 CHECK AUTO”

(see page 37)

EQ MODE:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from: PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the

SETUP

measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature (see page 26).

FRONT:

This mode matches the characteristics of each

OPERATION

speaker to those of the front speakers.

BASIC

FLA T:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

AUDYSSEY:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics

OPERATION

of all speakers so as to create the best listening

ADVANCED

environment for the sound characteristics of the listening room.

PRESET:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that was set in PRESET G.EQ ADJ to adjust the characteristics of each speaker (see page 37).

CONTROLLER

OFF:

REMOTE

The graphic equalizer is not used.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

TROUBLESHOOTING

ENTER button.

4 cursor buttons and press the

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,

“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button. T o use the remote controller (RC2001) to change the EQ MODE, To use the remote controller (RC2001) to change the EQ MODE, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. When EQ is displayed on the remote controller, press the EQ button.

Each time this button is pressed, the EQ MODE changes as follows.

OFF FRONT FLAT PRESETAUDYSSEY

Notes:

• “FRONT”, “FLAT” and “AUDYSSEY” can be selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto Setup is manually turned on, the “FRONT”, “FLA T” and “AUDYSSEY” modes cannot be selected.

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode, Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual mode is set.

• ACOUSTIC EQ MODEs are not used during playback of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD signals.

• Tone Control is disabled when an EQ MODE is in use.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PRESET ADJUST RESET:ALLCH 63-15.0 CH :SR 125 -2.5 250 -5.0

500 +9.0

0dB

1k +3.5 2k -5.5 4k -7.0 8k-18.5

250 1k 4k 16k

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63-15.0 CH:SR 125 -2.0 250 -5.0

500 +9.0

0dB

1k +3.0 2k -5.0 4k -7.0

-20-20

8k-18.0

250 1k 4k 16k

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

OTHERS

2. Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3 buttons.

4 cursor

ENGLISH

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3 ENTER button.

Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

RESET:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the channel(s) to be reset to either the currently displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”), and press the ENTER button to enter the setting. “ALL” : Resets all channels. “CH” : R esets only the currently displayed

CH:

Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”, “SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to enter the selection. Adjust the le vel with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5 dB increments.) Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and adjust the lev el.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor b uttons and press the ENTER button.

4 cursor buttons and press the

PRESET ADJUST RESET:CH 63 0.0 CH :FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0

-20

8k 0.0

250 1k 4k 16k

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

channel.

6-2 CHECK AUTO

These menus are for confirming the results of AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement (AUDYSSEY , FRONT, FLAT).

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3 ENTER button.

2. Select “CHECK AUTO” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT”, “FLAT”).

CH:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Notes:

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the Preset G. EQ modes.

• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO 2 menu.

Once ﬁ nished checking, select “RETURN” with

the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” menu.

4 cursor buttons and press the

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63 0.0 CH:FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0

-20

4k 0.0 8k 0.0

250 1k 4k 16k

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

7 NETWORK SETUP

These settings relate to playing music, photos, and movie ﬁ les stored on a network device connected to this unit.

Select “7. NETWORK SETUP” on the MAIN

MENU using the cursor buttons 3 or 4.

7.NETWORK SETUP

VIDEO :PAL RESOLUTION :AUTO

SCREEN SAVER:ON

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the menu you want to set using the cursor buttons 3 or 4, and press ENTER.

• VIDEO:

Select “PAL” or “NTSC” for the video system of the video signal to be output from this unit using the cursor buttons 1 or 2.

PAL:

Select this if the connected TV has the PAL colour system. It will change the video signal of an NTSC and output it to PAL format.

NTSC:

Select this if the connected TV has the NTSC colour system. It will change the video signal of a PAL and output it to NTSC format.

• RESOLUTION:

Use the 1 / 2 cursor buttons to select video signal resolution (pixel count) on the NETWORK PLAYER from the following options. “480/576i” ↔ “480/576p” ↔ “720p” ↔ “1080i” ↔ “AUT O” ↔ “480/576i”

AUTO:

Sets an appropriate resolution for a television that is connected using HDMI. (If the unit is not connected to the television using HDMI, the output is 480i/576i) (If connected by converting to DVI, the output is 480p/576p)

480i/576i:

The output is 480i/576i.

480p/576p:

The output is 480p/576p.

720p:

The output is 720p.

1080i:

The output is 1080i.

Notes:

• If a monitor connected using HDMI is changed during the AUTO setting, the screen returns automatically to the top menu and the resolution is changed to one that is appropriate for the monitor. If a dialog box or the TOOL menu is displayed at this time, the resolution is changed after the dialog box or TOOL menu is closed.

• Set 480i/576i if you are using VIDEO/S-VIDEO output.

• If you are using a monitor connected using HDMI, and the signal is being input from the network, the video signal is output in the resolution that was set in RESOLUTION.

• SCREEN SAVER:

Use the 1 / 2 cursor buttons to select “ON” or “OFF” for the screen saver from the video signal that is output from the unit.

ON:

If no operation is made for 10 minutes on the NETWORK screen or SETTING screen, the screen saver is activated on the monitor. (The screen goes dark)

OFF:

The screen saver is not activated even if no operation is made for 10 minutes.

Notes:

• The screen saver is not activated during photo display or video playback.

• This setting can only be changed when the NETWORK function of this unit is selected.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

UINPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

BASIC OPERATION

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Example : DVD

(Using the unit)

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on

OPERATION

the front panel.

BASIC

(Using the remote controller)

There are three ways to select DVD.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

Press the HOME button

Press the 1 button.

OTHERS

• As the input source is changed, the new input name will appear momentarily an OSD information on the video display. The input name will also appear in the display, on the front-panel.

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see page 24) , the renamed name appears on the display.

• As the input is changed, this unit will automatically switch to the digital input, surround mode,

≠

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

attenuation, and night mode status which were entered during the conﬁ guration process for that source.

• When a video source is selected, the selected video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT terminal.

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message on the FL display which will read "D-NORM X dB" (X being a numeric value). Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the source material has been recorded at a higher or lower level than usual.

NIGHT MODE

Useful at night or when loud noise is undesirable, this mode compresses the dynamic range, making it easier to hear quieter audio content without increasing the overall volume .

1. Press the HOME button. Press the 1.DVD button.

Press the 1.DVD button.

Example: AUTO SURROUND

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

ZONE

AUTO

MODE

7.1C

PURE

THX

INP

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

≠

Note that the effect of night mode is determined by the Dolby Digital content. Night mode may have no effect with content that does not support this function.

≠

(Using the unit)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback, press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the HOME button. Press the AMP button.

Press the < / > button until 007 is display ed.

Press the DVD button.

To select the Auto surround mode, press the HOME button, press the AMP button and press the < / > button until 005 is displayed. Press the AUTO SURR button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on page 40.

• T o add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode, press either the THX button on the unit or the THX button on the remote controller.

• To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the individual surround mode button on page 005, 006 on the remote controller.

T o select this mode, switch the remote controller

to AMP mode, and then press the < / > button until 003 is displayed.

Each time the NIGHT button is pressed, the

mode changes according to the following options indicated on the front of the unit.

ENGLISH

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BANDTEXITMENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

HDMI

3AV PRE TUNER AV8003

• AUTO Mode

NIGHT AUTO

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

AUTO mode is available when decording Dolby

TrueHD signals.

When night mode is activated, “NIGHT” is

illuminated on the front of the unit. (See page 6)

↓

•

NIGHTModeON

NIGHT ON

To program this unit for automatic standby, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the

Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the

dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.

↓

• NIGHT Mode OFF

NIGHT OFF

T urn off the Night mode.

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes or room acoustics.

(Using the remote controller)

To adjust the tone, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ or BASS–. To adjust the treble effect, TREBLE+ or TREBLE–.

Notes:

• The tone control function is unavailable for the Source Direct, Pure Direct, Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 176.4/192kHz PCM.

• The Tone control function is not available when MDAX is being used.

• The tone control function is not available when ACOUSTIC EQ is being used.

SLEEP button on the remote controller. Each press of the button will increase the time before shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 50 40

100 90 80 70 60 110 120

The sleep time will be shown for a fe w seconds in the display on the front panel, and it will count down until the time has elapsed. When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the unit will automatically turn off. Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the SLEEP indicator will disappear.

M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

• Additionally, tone control is not available during

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the

VOLUME control knob on the front panel or VOL + / – buttons on the remote controller. To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD playback.

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

clockwise or press VOL + button on the remote, to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or press VOL – button on the remote controller.

Notes:

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞ to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

•

However, when the channel level is set as described on page 31, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range

is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

• If the Main Volume is set to +9 dB or higher, it will be set to +8 dB the next time power is turned on. It will also be saved at +8 dB during back up.

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE button on the remote controller. This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the head-phone jack, but it will not affect an y recording or dubbing that may be in progress. When the system is muted, the display will show “MUTE” . Press the MUTE button again to return to normal operation.

This function makes up for lost audio content in MP3 or AAC sources (from lossy compression) during playback. Choose one of the following levels for this effect as desired. “HIGH”: Stronger effect “LOW”: Weaker effect “OFF”: Deactivated.

(Using the remote controller)

To switch to M-DAX mode, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and then press the < / > button until 001 is displayed. When “M-DAX” is displayed on the remote controller , press the M-DAX button.

Each time this button is pressed, M-DAX changes as follows.

OFF LOW HIG

Notes:

• M-DAX is compatible with PCM (48 kHz or lower) and two-channel analog sources.

• The M-DAX is not available when Dolby Virtual Speaker mode is being used.

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO) between the playback device and this unit, listening and viewing are possible with a single higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of this unit can output the input analog video signals (for component video signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR terminal.

Notes:

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit. If connecting a playback device such as a DVD player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit to a TV monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast forward and reverse play on video component.

•

If, while attempting to use the video convert feature, the unit cannot synchronize with the display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; there is nothing wrong with the unit. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next, connect the video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and the S-video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors input video signals and determines whether to convert the input signals or not. However, some input video signals cannot be detected correctly. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

•

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

For optimal video performance, THX recommends setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

or HDMI

Notes:

•

If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or SVIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

component

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

Notes of OSD menu system:

• The setup menu can be displayed through all video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”, “SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).

• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.

OSD information is also output when the video

conversion feature is on and the video signal input to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the unit is converted and output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

CONPONENT I/P

The video circuit of the unit is equipped with an I/P conversion feature . When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input from a playback device can be converted to 480p/576p and progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals of the unit. (For setting instructions, see page 33)

HDMI RESOLUTION

This function is used to output the analog video signal to HDMI. 480i/576i signals can be converted to 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals, while 480p/576p signals can be converted to 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals. The output resolution can be set for HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2.

Notes:

• Do not set to 1080i, 720p, or 1080p when connected to a monitor that does not support 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals. The SETUP MENU will not be displayed. If the SETUP MENU is not displayed, change settings while viewing the main unit display panel.

• A 720p signal cannot be converted to 1080i or 1080p signal, and a 1080i signal cannot be converted to a 1080p signal.

• The resolution of analog component output cannot be changed.

• HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output simultaneously.

SURROUND MODE

This unit is equipped with many surround modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound effects, according to the content of the source to be played. The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

The relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal

The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the unit or the remote controller. However, the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

AUTO Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

SOURCE DIRECT PURE DIRECT

EX/ES Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES

Multi-PCM

SA-CD (5.1ch)

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyTrueHD DolbyTrueHD DolbyTrueHD

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital +

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

DolbyDigital +

Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO

SLSRSBL

SubW

SBR

---

---ODSD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

---

---ODSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL

ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

Depend on speaker setup

ENGLISH

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

DOLBY (PLIIx movie) (PLIIx music) (PLIIx game)

DTS (Neo:6 Cinema) (Neo:6 Music)

CSII Cinema CSII Music CSII Mono

STEREO Dolby Surr.EX Stereo

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Multi Ch. Movie Music (O): Movie mode only.

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx HDCD Pro Logic IIx Analog Pro Logic IIx DTS-ES DTS 5.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD(5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD(6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD(7.1) DTS-HD Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6 SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6 PCM (Audio) Neo:6 HDCD Neo:6 Analog Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch) CS Dolby D (2ch Surr) CS SA-CD (2ch) CS PCM (Audio) CS HDCD CS Analog CS

Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo DTS-ES Stereo DTS 96/24 Stereo DTS (5.1ch) Stereo DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Stereo Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo SA-CD (2ch) Stereo PCM (Audio) Stereo PCM 96kHz Stereo HDCD Stereo Analog Stereo Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital +

II II II II II II

Stereo Stereo Stereo

Stereo

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O

SLSRSBL

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

SBR

---

---Odts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

---Odts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---Odts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---Odts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

---OPCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---ODSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---ODSD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, R

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,LFE

DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,S,LFE

DIGITAL

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Multi Ch. Movie Music

(O): Movie mode only. Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P

THX (AUTO)

THX Ultra2 (THX EX) (THX Cinema) (THX Music) (THX Games)

DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel PCM (Audio) Multi Channel HDCD Multi Channel Analog Multi Channel

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo

DTS-ES Dolby H.P DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo

DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo

DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo

Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P

SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P

PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P

HDCD Dolby H.P

Analog Dolby H.P

Dolby Surr.EX

Dolby D (5.1ch)

Dolby D (2ch)

Dolby D (2ch Surr)

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

SA-CD (2ch)

PCM (Audio)

HDCD

Analog

Dolby Surr.EX

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX

Dolby D (2ch)

Dolby D (2ch Surr)

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

DTS (5.1ch)

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX

SA-CD (2ch)

PCM (Audio)

HDCD

Analog

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

Stereo Stereo Stereo

Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1 Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

Ultra2 Cinema Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

DTS + THX

Ultra

2 Cinema

Ultra2 Cinema

Ultra2 Cinema Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

Notes:

• Surround modes other than Stereo are not available during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD playback.

If surround modes other than Stereo are selected

and Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD content is played, the surround mode setting is disabled.

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

O (O) O O O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

SLSRSBL

SubW

SBR

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, R

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

Abbreviations L/R : Front speakers C : Center speaker SL/SR : Surround speakers SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers SubW : Subwoofer

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

AUTO

FUNCTION

When this mode is selected, the unit determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby T rueHD , DTS-HD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM audio.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal. When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the number of channels for which the corresponding signal is encoded will be played. Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with Dolby surround status automatically subjects that signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play. PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this mode.

Notes:

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop

OPERATION

BASIC

may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed to AUTO mode automatically. See page 40 to conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit

OPERATION

ADVANCED

Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration are bypassed for full-range frequency response and the purist audio reproduction.

Notes:

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center = LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• In SOURCE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and M-DAX are not available.

TROUBLESHOOTING

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode, by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and turning the FL display off.

Note:

OTHERS

• In PURE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and MDAX are not available.

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material such as DVD. This mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Dolby Digital EX In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called surround back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front r ight, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever bef ore . Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do not have without surround back speak er(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1) DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic positioning, and makes acoustic image movement more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction. This unit incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete recording of all channels, including the surround back channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction. DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have surround back speakers.

Dolby MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx MUSIC, Pro Logic

This mode is used with source materials encoded in Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGIT AL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in Dolby Digital. Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Eff ect channel. Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes: Pro Logic IIx MOVIE This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie soundtracks.

Pro Logic

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or digital), such as CD, tape , FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc. Pro Logic IIx GAME This mode surround effects by routing them to the system’s subwoofer .

5.1ch + Pro Logic

This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from

5.1 channel sources

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes:

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II

mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 29)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

x GAME)

x MUSIC

restores the impact low-frequency

x Movie

movie soundtracks

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2 channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in dts multichannel. Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts sources provides five main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Eff ects channel. dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode. The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology . The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties in the frequency characteristics of the channels as well as in channel separation. According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6 uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized for music playbac k.

Note:

The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input

• signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

CIRCLE SURROUND II

-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)

(CS

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel surround sound playback of non-encoded and multichannel encoded material. Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to

6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast, videotape and stereo recorded music. Depending on source material, you can select CSII- Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono mode.

Note:

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

ENGLISH

STEREO

This mode bypasses all surround processing. In stereo program sources, the left and right channels play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is input. With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM source material can be played back in stereo mode.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the front channels, allowing the user to experience sound as if surround speakers were actually being used.

MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more natural soundstage from two channel source material. This is done by feeding the left channel signal to both the left front and left surround speakers and the right channel signal to both the right front and right surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

Note:

• Audio is not output from the CENTER channel when using MUL TI CH. MUSIC mode.

THX CINEMA

THX Cinema mode applies additional processing to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multichannel, surround sources. The THX processing was developed by THX Ltd. to recreate the sound of top-quality theater. Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc, tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround EX mode is not available.

THX SURROUND EX

THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel source whenever THX is active. THX Surround EX is not available in system without surround back speaker(s).

Note:

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the THX Surround EX mode.

THX ULTRA2 CINEMA

THX ULTRA2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sound. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected, if the appropriate ﬂ ag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital ﬂ ag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX ULTRA2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.

THX MUSIC

For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage. This mode is to be used with multichannel music sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital

5.1 music.

Notes:

• These modes are only available when you have setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround back speakers).

• These modes are only available when the input signal has surround left and surround right contents.

THX GAMES

For the replay of stereo and multichannel game audio the THX Games mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360-degree playback environment. THX Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround ﬁ eld.

Neural Surround

Neural SurroundTM represents the latest advancement in surround technology developed f or m usic. Neural Surround frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multichannel surround playback.

employs psychoacoustic

CAUTION

Note for DTS

•

To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD player needs to support DTS digital output. You may not be able to play some DTS source signals from certain CD players and LD players even if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response), and the unit cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are playing in another surround mode, you cannot switch to digital input or from digital input to analog input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a ZONE.

•

The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT, TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

•

When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal. In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

•

The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be used when playing PCM signals with a sampling frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/ Audio discs).

•

Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

•

Some DVD discs f eature cop y protection. When using such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

Note for HDCD

•

HDCD is effective only through digital input.

•

You may not be able to play some HDCD source signals from certain CD players if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response) and the unit cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

FUNCTION

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

OAUT O

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M -DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

NAV PR E TUNER AV8003

TENTER

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

AD VANCED OPERATION

DISPLAY MODE

DISP DISPLAY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

E DIRECT

-DAX

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

You can select the display mode for the front display of the unit. To select this mode, press the DISPLAY button on

BASIC

the front panel, or switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the DISPLAY button. When this button is pressed, the display mode is switched in the following sequence .

Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF → Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input

ADVANCED

Mode

Normal Mode:

Displays the selected input function. If the function has been renamed using the Function Rename feature (see page 24), the renamed name appears on the display.

Input Mode:

REMOTE

Displays the input mode set via the Function Input Setup feature (see page 23).

Surround Mode:

Displays the status of the selected surround mode.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to the unit such as the input or surround mode, the display will show that change, then go back to off after about 3 seconds.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note:

• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the front display in display off condition.

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source selected for listening through this unit is sent to the record outputs. This means that any program you are watching or listening to may be recorded simply by placing machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in the record mode.

To recor d the input source signal you are currently watching or listening to

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DIRECT

PHONES

1. To select the input source for recording, turn the INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the front panel or press the HOME button and then the appropriate numeric buttons 1 through 9 on the remote controller.

The input source is now selected and you may

watch or listen to it as desired.

The currently selected input source signal

is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for

recording.

Start recording to the recording component as

desired.

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you can temporarily select the audio input mode for each input source as following procedures. Switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 002 is displa yed. Then press the A/D button. When this button is pressed, the input mode is switched in the following sequence .

Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and analog input jacks for the selected input source are detected automatically. If no digital signal is being input, the analog input jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI input has been assigned as an input source. When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input terminal.

Analog mode:

The analog input jacks are selected.

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug. Note that the speakers will automatically be turned off when the headphone jack is in use.

AV PRE TU

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

Notes:

• When using headphones, the surround mode will change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the jack.

• The 7.1ch input mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is inserted to the jack.

Notes:

• When connecting only digital signal input, output cannot be made to the TAPEOUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, or DSS/VCR2 OUT terminals. When using recording functions, be sure to also make connections for analog signal input.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in memory. T o store changes to the input mode , select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 23)

• No conversion is made from Video signal input to S-Video signal output or from S-Video signal input to Video signal output. Always use the same signal type for both input and output.

• Video or audio signals input to HDMI input terminals cannot be recorded.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

TAV P RE TUNER AV8003

EENTER

DISPLAY

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODEBANDEXITMENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

HDMI

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual sounds heard from the speakers. When headphones are used, the MENU button automatically switches to the Dolby headphone mode. The OSD that appears when the MENU button is pressed is shown below .

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE :DH SURROUND :PL

L LEVEL :+10.0dB R LEVEL : 0.0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected with the left and right cursor buttons. BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

system that delivers a sound similar to room speakers.

It makes it possible to experience the

volume and space of a 5-channel surround system using ordinary stereo headphones.

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is displayed as the mode indication.

The surround mode can be selected when the modes in DH is selected.

L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• In headphone mode, Tone Control and ACOUSTIC EQ are not available.

II MV

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, the “PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If this happens, switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Then press the ATT button. “ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by about half. Attenuation will not work with the output signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and DSS/VCR2-OUT. This function is memorized for each individual input source.

7.1 CH INPUT

This unit is equipped for future expansion through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel player or DVD-Audio player. When this is selected, the input signals connected to the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left) and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1 CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and right), center, surround (left and right) and surround back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks without passing through the surround circuitry. In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack. When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs. This permits simultaneous viewing with video sources

1. 2.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

AV PRE

HDMI

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

MEMORY

T-MODE

DISPLAY

M-DAX

≠

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

1. Select a desired Video source to decide the routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front

panel or switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. Then press 7.1 CH IN on the remote controller to switch to 7.1 channel input.

If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

each channel, press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Press the CH SELECT button on the remote controller.

Adjust the speaker output lev els so that you can

hear the same sound level from each speaker at the listening position. For the front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right and surround back speakers, the output levels can be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18

and +12 dB.

These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1

CH. INPUT memory.

Adjust the main volume with the MAIN VOLUME

knob or the VOL + / – buttons on the remote controller.

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT, press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH IN on the remote controller.

Notes:

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select a surround mode, as the external decoder determines processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

• Furthermore, the following functions are not available during 7.1 CH Input use.

Test Tone, NIGHT MODE, Source Direct, Pure

Direct, RE-EQ, T one Control, Multi EQ.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

AUX INPUT

If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals with multi channel decoder, L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are available as AUX input. In this case, You can connect additional audio source

CONNECTIONS SETUP

to AUX as other audio input terminals.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

To select AUX, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel, or press HOME button and press 6

OPERATION

button on remote controller.

BASIC

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the unit or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the

OPERATION

ADVANCED

unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting. To select video off, switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Then press the VIDEO OFF button.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

PURE DIRECT

TROUBLESHOOTING

PHONES

V-OFF

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION

This function allows the component connected to the TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to the unit.

AUTO POWER ON

1. Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Ref er to page 33)

Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-

VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the VIDEO input.

Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the

unit.

T urn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receiv able

station.

When the station is received, this unit turns ON

and TV is selected automatically.

AUTO POWER OFF

1. In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF or select a channel that does not contain any broadcast.

The power to the unit switches to STANDBY

after approx. 5 min utes.

Notes:

• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if this unit is set to a source other than TV.

The function reactivates when TV is selected again.

• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO FUNCTION to turn ON.

• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO ON/OFF” function.

• This function is inactive when STANDBY MODE is set to ECONOMY. To use this function, set STANDBY MODE to NORMAL.

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor, projector, etc.) connected to the unit a time lag can occur between image signal processing and audio signal processing. Though minor, this time lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP. SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect to the image signal output from the unit to correct the time lag between the sound and image. It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. To select Lip-sync mode, set the remote controller to the AMP mode, press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. Press the LIP. SYNC button. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to 200 ms. Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV, monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

Note:

• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically restored.

• Even if you do not correct the time lag manually this way, audio and video are automatically synchronized when the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a. For instructions on Auto Lipsync Correction, see page 34.

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY

The unit stores settings information in nonvolatile memory even when the main power supply is turned off. Using the Dual Backup Memory function, you can write settings information to another memory area to back up saved settings for recovery anytime as needed.

BACKUP

Set up the unit in the state for which you want to store the settings. Hold the MEMORY and ENTER buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

“MEMORY SAVING” is displayed and the unit’s settings are saved. The stored settings information is retained until Dual Backup Memory is used again and the information is overwritten.

MEMORY SAVING

Note:

• The following settings values cannot be backed up.

• Main Zone Volume

• Zone Volume

• Zone Speaker Volume

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

The “V-OFF” indicator on the main unit display panel will light.

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

RECOVERY OF MEMORY

Recover backed up settings as follows. Hold the MEMORY and MENU buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

RE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

“MEMORY LOAD” is displayed and the unit’s stored settings are reapplied. The unit temporarily enters standby mode. If there is no backup data, “NO BACKUP” is displayed and no data is recovered.

MEMORY LOAD

NO BACKUP

Note:

• Because the following settings values are not backed up, each Volume value is set to Minimum.

• Main Zone Volume

• Zone Volume

• Zone Speaker Volume

TUNER OPERATION

TO SELECTING THE TUNER

(Using the unit)

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

To select TUNER, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

There are three ways to select TUNER.

Press the HOME button

Press the 4 button.

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

2 1

≠

1. Press the HOME button. Press the < / > button until 002 is display ed.

Press the 4.TUNER button.

≠

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

AUTO TUNING

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

AUTO

PURE

THX

DIRECT

PHONES

3. 2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2 4

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto tuning function.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1. Press the HOME button. Press the AMP button.

Press the < / > button until 008 is display ed.

Press the TUNER button.

Press the < / > button until 001 is display ed.

Press the FM or AM button.

Press and hold the 3 or 4 cursor button for 1

second or more.

5. Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

FUNCTION

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

Note:

The same operations performed using the 3/ 4 buttons can be performed using the – TUNE + button of item 002 when the remote controller is in TUNER mode.

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the “Manual Tuning” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

AUTO

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

3. 2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

HDMI

DOWN

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

BASIC

ADVANCED

2 4

REMOTE

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel to select the desired station.

4 cursor buttons to tune in the

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

Press the < / > button until 001 is display ed.

Press the FM or AM button.

Press the 3

deseired station.

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

VOLUME

CLEAR

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

AUTO, TUNED, ST T-MODE

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will be illuminated on the display. The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo broadcast is tuned in. At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the “TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated. If the signal is weak, it may be difﬁ cult to tune into

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations in any order. For each station, you can memorize the frequency and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM band and enters all stations with proper signal strength into the memory.

2. 4.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

3.5.2.

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

the station in stereo. In such a case, press the

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button until 001 is displayed.

Press the FM or AM button.

Press the GUIDE button on the remote

controller, display will show “FREQ----”. lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the

ten numbered keypad on the remote

The desired station will automatically be tuned.

controller

T-MODE button on the front panel, or switch the remote controller to TUNER mode and press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. Then press the T- MODE button. “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST” indicator is not illuminated. To retur n to auto stereo mode, Press the T-MODE button or Press T-MODE button on the remote

controller again. AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.

1. To select FM , press the BAND button on the front panel.

While pressing the MEMORY button, press the

1 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency .

3. Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve seconds.

During this time, the following operations are

possible. The band can be changed by the BAND button.

4. If no button is pressed during this period, the current station is memorized in location Preset

02.

If you wish to skip the current station, press the

3 cursor button during this period, this station is skipped and auto presetting continues.

Operation stops automatically when all 60

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when auto scanning attains the highest end of all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

3. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1 → No.2 → etc.) f or 10 seconds each.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

2. 4.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

ZONE

EXIT

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

(Using the unit)

(Using the remote controller)

Select the desired preset station by pressing

the 1 or 2

cursor

buttons on the front panel.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to tune in the

(Using the unit)

Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the

deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

Note:

The same operations performed using the 1 or 2 buttons can be performed using the CH +/- buttons when the remote controller is in TUNER mode.

display.

Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2

cursor

buttons, while this is still blinking

PRESET SCAN

(approx. 5 seconds)

Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The

display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

2.5.2.5.

memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

2.2.

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed in

TUNER mode.

Press the MEMORY button on the remote

controller. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example), either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed and

press the P-SCAN button on the remote.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display

and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

You can fast forward the preset stations, press

the 2 cursor button continuously.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing the CLEAR button or P-SCAN button on the remote controller.

PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY

A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in this unit can be displayed.

2. 4.

2. 4

2.2.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press < / > on the remote controller to display

002, then press P-INFO button.

The list of preset channels will be displayed on

the screen of the TV monitor connected to this unit.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a time.

If there are more than 10 channels, press P-INFO button on the remote controller once more to display the next page.

The list display will disappear automatically in 5

seconds.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory using the following procedure.

3.2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMORY button on the remote . The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote controller.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate that the specified preset number has been cleared.

Note:

To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

•

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in the sequential order: I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz (notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 4:

OPERATION

To sort the numbers, press the 4 cursor button while

BASIC

holding down the MEMORY b utton. “PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and sorting will be done.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

This function allows the name of each preset channel to be entered using alphanumeric characters. Before name inputting, you need to store preset stations with the preset memory operation.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

5. 2. 5. 6.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

EXIT

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2.5.6.2.5.6.

5.5.

1. Recall the preset number to be inputted name with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMORY button on the remote

5. After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered, press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press the MEMORY button on the remote controller.

The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the next

column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the same way.

To mov e back and forth between the characters,

press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons on the front panel or the remote controller.

Note:

• Unused columns should be filled by entering blanks.

To save the name, press the MEMORY or

ENTER button on the front panel, or press the MEMORY button on the remote controller for

more than 2 seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons

or the on the front panel remote controller to select characters, characters can be input from the numeric keys of the remote controller. See the below table for a correspondence between characters and numeric keys.

Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A → B → C → 1 → A D → E → F → 2 → D G → H → I → 3 → G J → K → L → 4 → J M → N → O → 5 → M P → Q → R → 6 → P S → T → U → 7 → S V → W → X → 8 → V Y → Z → space → 9 → Y – → + → / → 0

RDS OPERATION

Now in use in many countries, RDS (Radio Data System) is a description of the station’s programming hidden space in the FM signal. Your new unit is equipped with RDS to assist in the selection of FM stations using station and network names, rather than broadcast frequencies. Additional RDS functions include the ability to search for programme types.

RADIO TEXT

Some RDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT , which is additional information on the station and programme being broadcast. RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘r unning’ text in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character by the radio station. As a result of that it may take some time until the entire text has been completely received.

RDS DISPLAY

When a unit is tuned to an FM station that is transmitting RDS data, the Front Panel Information Display will automatically show the station name or RDS TEXT in place of the typical display of the station’s broadcast frequency. T o change the displa y, switch the remote controller to TUNER mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Press the DISPLAY button.

controller for more than 3 seconds.

The left most column of the station name

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry ready status.

When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on

the front panel or the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the remote controller, alphabetic and numeric characters will be displayed in the following order:

A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +

→ / → (Blank) → A UP → → DOWN

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) DISPLAY

The RDS system categorizes programmes according to their genre into different programme type (PTY) groups. To display the programme type information of the current station, switch the remote controller to TUNER mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Press the PTY button.

RT (

RADIO TEXT

PS (

Program Service Name

) Frequency

)

PTY AUTO SEARCH

Your unit is equipped to automatically search for stations transmitting any of 29 different programme types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures:

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

1.3.4.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

EXIT

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

1.3.

1. Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE on the remote controller. The current station’ s PTY will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY group will be displayed in blinking if no station or RDS data is present.

To change to a new PTY type, press the

TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or numeric buttons on the remote controller until

the desired PTY is shown in the display.

3. Once the desired PTY group or type has been selected, press the PTY button while the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will pause at each station broadcasting RDS PTY information corresponding to the selected choice.

To advance to the next RDS station with the

desired PTY, press the PTY button again within 5 seconds.

NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE

1 POP Pop Music 2 ROCK Rock Music 3 MOR M. O. R. Music 4 LIGHT Light classical 5 CLASSIC Serious classical 6 NEWS News 7 AFFAIR Current Affairs 8 INFO Information

9 SPORT Sport 10 EDUCATE Education 11 DRAMA Drama 12 CULTURE Culture 13 SCIENCE Science 14 OTHERS Varied 15 OTHER Other Music 16 WEATHER Weather 17 FINANCE Finance 18 CHILDREN Children’s programmes 19 SOCIAL Social Affairs 20 RELIGION Religion 21 PHONE IN Phone In 22 TRAVEL Travel 23 HOBBIES Hobbies 24 JAZZ Jazz Music

ZONE SYSTEM

The Zone System mode allows the same source or different sources to be heard in two ZONEs other than where this unit is installed.

To use the zone system, connect the audio from the ZONE OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to the ZONE A and B amps.

Connect the VIDEO output (ZONE OUT) terminal to the monitor in Zone A. (ZONE OUT terminal is linked to the source selector in Zone A.)

If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C (see page 18) are not used in the ZONE where this unit is installed, the zone speaker system can be used with the amp for the surround back channel.

Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2 terminal can be used for the monitor output of ZONE A.

This unit supports zone system functions such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep timers and remote control.

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT TERMINALS

3. 4.1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

EXIT

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

1. Pressing the ZONE button on the unit one time accesses the ZONE A settings. Pressing it tw o times accesses the ZONE B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the zone feature off.

When the ZONE setting mode is engaged, one

of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

* Displa y when ZONE A is selected

ZA DVD -18dB

* Displa y when ZONE B is selected

ZB DVD -18dB

3. Select an input source with the INPUT SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the ZONE used in the zone system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 35)

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

25 COUNTRY Country Music 26 NATION National Music 27 OLDIES Oldies Music

TROUBLESHOOTING

28 FOLK Folk Music 29 DOCUMENT Documentary

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE SURROUND BACK PREOUT TERMINALS

This unit allows you to connect another set of power amp and place them in a different ZONE or separated area for Iistening to music.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

3. 4.1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

1. Pressing the ZONE SPEAKER button on the

OPERATION

BASIC

unit one time accesses the ZONE SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times accesses the ZONE SPEAKER B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the ZONE SPEAKER feature off.

When the ZONE SPEAKER setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears

OPERATION

ADVANCED

on the display for 10 seconds.

* Displa y when ZONE SPEAKER A is selected

ZSA DVD -18dB

HDMI

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

Notes for Zone Speaker

• The Zone Speaker mode can be set for only one of the ZONEs, A or B.

• The ZONE SPEAKER output can be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE, ZSP A or ZSP B” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 29)

• “The Surr . Back Speakers ar e in use” is displayed when the ZONE SPEAKER button is pressed when

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

the Surround Back Speaker is not set to “NONE, ZSP A or ZSP B” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

(See SPEAKER SETUP, page 29)

• The Zonespeaker mode cannot be used at the same time as the speaker C. When connecting for zone use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to OFF.

• When the unit is put in ZONE SPEAKER mode and ZSP A or ZSP B has been set as the Surround Back

CONTROLLING THE ZONE FUNCTION FROM ANOTHER ROOM

The ZONE function can be controlled from another ZONE, even from a ZONE not set for this unit, by connecting a MARANTZ product with external IR receiver or infrared receiver using the RC2001 or Zone remote controller RC101. (See page 17)

SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER TO A MODE THAT CONTROLS ZONE A OR B.

Operations such as switching the input source between ZONE A and B and turning the ZONE function on/off can be performed by setting the ZONE for using the remote controller.

1. (In the example given here, the user changes the mode used to control ZONE A.)

Hold down the SET button and ZONE button

simultaneously until the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice. The backlight lights.

Press the ZONE A button. The Send indicator

ﬂ ashes twice when the setting is complete.

The following buttons are now used for ZONE

A only. Volume adjustment, sleep timer, mute, and input functions can be selected from the ZONE.

POWER ON/OFF

Speaker (P.29), the ZONE SPEAKER function can be turned on automatically simply by pressing the SOURCE button.

SOURCE

3. 3. 1

1. Press the HOME button. Press the </> button umtil 003 is displayed.

Press the ZONE-A or ZONE-B button.

INFO SLEEP

VOL +/– MUTE

* Displa y when ZONE SPEAKER B is selected

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

ZSB DVD -18dB

3. Select an input source with the INPUT

TROUBLESHOOTING

SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the ZONE used in the zone system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page

35.)

OTHERS

<RC101>

ZONE A mode (default setting) ZONE B mode ZONE C mode (this zone not used by this unit) ZONE D mode: MAIN ZONE (the ZONE in which this unit is installed)

Once the operation in 2. is performed, pressing the ZONE B button switches the mode being controlled to ZONE B. Pressing the ZONE D button switches the mode being controlled to MAIN ZONE.

Notes:

• When using a tuner (AM or FM) in the MAIN ZONE and tuner is selected for the input function of ZONE, the tuner cannot be used from ZONE. Only the same broadcast as that being used for MAIN ZONE can be listened to.

• ZONE output is analog only. Digital signal input is not supported.

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING ZONE SPEAKERS

Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A or ZONE-B mode. ZONE Speakers can be controlled on the ﬁ rst page of the remote controller.

<RC101>

An RC101 remote controller set to ZONE A or ZONE B can be switched to control the ZONE Speaker function.

1. (In the example given here, the setting for ZONE is switched to the setting for ZONE Speakers.)

Hold down the SET button and POWER ON

button simultaneously until the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice.

The backlight continues to ﬂ ash.

Press numeric key 2.

ZONE mode: 1 (default setting) ZONE Speaker mode: 2

Notes:

• To restore the settings for ZONE, press numeric key 1 in step 2.

• Only the MAIN ZONE can be controlled when ZONE D mode is set.

Press the ENTER button. Once settings are

complete, the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice.

The following buttons are used for set ZONE

mode or ZONE Speaker mode only.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/– MUTE

INFO SLEEP

OSD INFORMATION DISPLAY ON THE ZONE MONITOR

The setting status of ZONE A can be displayed on a TV monitor connected to the video output for ZONE (ZONE OUT) terminals.

1. Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A mode. Press the INFO button.

<RC101>

1. Press the INFO button.

OSD information is displayed on the ZONE

monitor.

ZONE A VIDEO :DSS AUDIO :DSS SLEEP :90 min MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE :ON SPKR :OFF VOL :VARI VOL :VARI LEVEL:-20dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ZONE STATUS --VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

Notes:

The OSD cannot be displayed on the ZONE monitor when the OSD is being displayed for ZONE.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

REMO TE CONTROLLER OPERATION

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC2001 TO THE UNIT

To control the unit by your RC2001, you have to select the device AMP, NETWORK or TUNER by pressing the function selector in HOME mode. Please refer below for the details in AMP, NETWORK and TUNER mode.

Note:

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Except for some buttons, soft buttons result in the same operation as pressing either the Left or Right buttons for each command. (Excluding the * symbol)

HOME MODE

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the AV8003 on and off POWER ON Turn the AV8003 on POWER OFF Turn the AV8003 off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

ENTER

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level 1 SELECT DVD function 2 SELECT DSS function 3 SELECT NETWORK function 4 SELECT TUNER function 5 SELECT CD function 6 SELECT AUX function 7 SELECT VCR1 function 8 SELECT TV function 9 SELECT TAPE function

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

HOME MACRO Switch the remote controller to MACRO mode. AMP Switch the remote controller to AMP mode.

1.DVD Switch the remote controller to 1. DVD mode.

2.DSS Switch the remote controller to 2. DSS mode.

3.NETWORK Switch the remote controller to 3. NETWORK mode. HOME

4.TUNER Switch the remote controller to 4. TUNER mode.

5.CD Switch the remote controller to 5. CD mode.

6.AUX Switch the remote controller to 6. AUX mode.

7.VCR1 Switch the remote controller to 7. VCR1 mode.

8.TV Switch the remote controller to 8. TV mode. HOME

9.TAPE Switch the remote controller to 9. TAPE mode. VCR2 Switch the remote controller to VCR2 mode.

PLASMA Switch the remote controller to PLASMA mode. ZONE-A Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A mode. ZONE-B Switch the remote controller to ZONE-B mode. HOME IPOD Switch the remote controller to IPOD mode. V-SWITCH Switch the remote controller to V-SWITCH mode.

CD-R Switch the remote controller to CDR mode. MD Switch the remote controller to MD mode. BLU-RAY Switch the remote controller to BLU-RAY mode.

Enter the SETUP MENU Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

MACRO MODE

A macro is a function for performing multiple button operations at one time . Ex.) WATCH DVD Tur n on the AV8003. = Turn on the TV. = Turn on the DVD. = Set the TV function to DVD. = Set the AMP function to DVD. = Set the remote controller to D VD mode .

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

MACRO ALL-ON Turn on all components. ALL-OFF Turn off all components.

WATCH DVD View DVD WATCH DSS View DSS WATCH NET View NETWORK MACRO LISTEN AM Listen to AM LISTEN FM Listen to FM

LISTEN XM Listen to XM LISTEN SR Listen to SIRIUS LISTEN CD Listen to CD MACRO LSTN IPOD Listen to iPod WATCH VCR View VCR

WATCH TV View TV

ENGLISH

AMP MODE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the AV8003 on and off POWER ON Turn the AV8003 on POWER OFF Turn the AV8003 off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

ENTER

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level 1 Select DVD function 2 Select DSS function 3 Select NETWORK function 4 Select TUNER function 5 Select CD function 6 Select AUX function 7 Select VCR1 function 8 Select TV function 9 Select TAPE function

Enter the SETUP MENU Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

AMP M-DAX M-DAX ON/OFF SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function

DISPLAY

SURR MODE Selects the surround mode

- INPUT + Switches the amp function* AMP

7.1CH IN

A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL AUDIO SELECT AUDIO mode

1-HDMI-2

LIP SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode AMP

- BASS +

-TREBLE+

RE-EQ RE-EQ ON/OFF NIGHT NIGHT mode ON/OFF EQ SELECT EQ mode AMP TEST TONE Select TEST TONE menu

CH SELECT

-CH LEV+

ATT Reduces the input level VIDEO OFF VIDEO OFF AMP

AUTO SURR

STEREO Select STEREO mode

P DIRECT Select PURE DIRECT mode THX Select THX mode

M-CH ST

AMP

DTS Select DTS mode

ES/EX Select EX/ES mode CS2 Select CS2 mode VIRTUAL Select VIRTUAL mode

Changes the front display mode

Turns 7.1CH INPUT mode ON/ OFF.

(Left) SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 1*

(Right) SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 2*

(Left) BASS -* (Right) BASS +* (Left) TREBLE -* (Right) TREBLE +*

Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch input setup

(Left) CH LEVEL-* (Right) CH LEVEL+*

Select AUTO SURROUND mode

Select MULTI CHANNEL STEREO mode

Select DOLBY mode

Page Command Note

AMP DVD Select DVD function TV Select TV function

VCR1 Select VCR1 function DSS Select DSS function AUX Select AUX function AMP TAPE Select TAPE function CD Select CD function

TUNER Select TUNER function NETWORK Select NETWORK function

AMP

P. AMP ON

P. AMP OFF

Use when you want to turn on the MM8003 by itself.

Use when you want to turn off the MM8003 by itself.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

NETWORK MODE

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to top of NETWORK page INFO Used for displaying ﬁ le details, etc. Cursor Used for moving the cursor, etc. ENTER Used for item selection, etc. MENU Enter the Tool menu EXIT Used to return to the previous page, etc. CH +/- Switch the page

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Used during NETWORK settings Blue Move to top of MUSIC page Red Move to top of PHOTO page Green Move to top of VIDEO page Yellow Move to top of SERVER page

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function

5 / 6

RANDOM RANDOM play

REPEAT REPEAT play TOP Move to top of NETWORK page

- PAGE +

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function MUSIC ALL Move to All Songs M ARTIST Move to MUSIC ARTIST

M ALBUM Move to MUSIC ALBUM M GENRE Move to MUSIC GENRE M P-LIST Move to MUSIC PLAYLIST

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function PHOTO ALL Move to ALL PHOTO P ALBUM Move to PHOTO ALBUM

P P-LIST Move to PHOTO PLAYLIST

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function VIDEO ALL Move to ALL Video V ALBUM Move to VIDEO ALBUM

V GENRE Move to VIDEO GENRE V P-LIST Move to VIDEO PLAYLIST

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

(left) Move to previous page* (right) Move to next page*

TUNER MODE

Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Enter F-DIRECT mode. Cursor UP Frequency scan up Cursor DOWN Frequency scan down Cursor LEFT Selects a preset station down Cursor RIGHT Selects a preset station up CH + / - Selects a preset station up and down 0–9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

4.TUNER Select TUNER function FM Select FM AM Select AM

XM Select XM SIRIUS Select SIRIUS NEURAL Select NEURAL AUDIO

4.TUNER Select TUNER function

- TUNE +

T-MODE Select MONO/STEREO P-SCAN Select PRESET SCAN P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION MEMORY Enter the tuner preset memory numbers

4.TUNER Select TUNER function

-SAT TUN+

SAT DISP Switch display information

-SAT CAT+

XM SR

P-LOCK Select PAEENTAL LOCK

4.TUNER Select TUNER function DISPLAY Switch display information PTY RDS PTY AUTO SEARCH mode

AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY STM RDS STATION mode DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE

(Left) Frequency scan down* (Right) Freqency scan up*

(Left) Category search down* (Right) Category search up* (Left) Select XM* (Right) Select SIRIUS*

OTHERS

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function PLAYLIST Add to playlist BILINGUAL Switch audio during movie playback

SETTINGS Move to SETTINGS MENU

RESTART Restart NETWORK

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

Note:

• Not all commands are necessarily supported by each source component.

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off POWER ON Turns the DVD player on POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft button in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc EXIT Retuen to MENU

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9, +10 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

1.DVD Select DVD function

5 / 6

ANGLE Select ANGLE SUBTITLE Select SUB TITLE AUDIO Select LANGUAGES

1.DVD Select DVD function ZOOM ZOOM mode ON/OFF SETUP Select SETUP MENU

VIDEO ADJ Fine Video adjustment V ON/OFF VIDEO ON/OFF DIMMER FL Display Dimmer

1.DVD Select DVD function PROGRAM PROGRAM mode REPEAT REPEAT mode

A-B REPEAT A to B RANDOM RANDOM play COND MEMO Memorize the disc settings

1.DVD Select DVD function SOUNDMODE Switch to PLAY mode SEARCH Switch to SEARCH mode

SCAN Enter the scan mode PAGE Switch page for DVD-Audio HDMI Change HDMI resolution

1.DVD Select DVD function DISC SKIP Moves to the next available disc tray.

1-DISC-2

3-DISC-4

5-DISC- (Left) DVD Changer DISC5*

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* Tray OPEN/CLOSE

(Left) DVD Changer DISC1* (Right) DVD Changer DISC2* (Left) DVD Changer DISC3* (Right) DVD Changer DISC4*

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A DSS (DSS MODE)

FUNCTION

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE)

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DSS on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU. INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc EXIT RETURN TO MENU INPUT Switch DSS input PREV Goes to previous selected channel CH + / - Switch DSS channel

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

2.DSS Select DSS function MEMO Enter a recording program DISPLAY On screen channel marker

TV/VCR Select TV/ VCR AUDIO Select Audio mode EJECT Eject

2.DSS Select DSS function FAV Fatvorite user channel list ALT Alternate audio channel language

FTCH Brings up on screen channel logo ANT Select broadcast or antenna

Play Skip forward or previous track Rec Stop Pause

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off POWER ON Turns the CD player on POWER OFF Turns the CD player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9, +10 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

5.CD Select CD function

5 / 6

SOUNDMODE Change sound mode QUICK RP Jump back the current playing DISPLAY Turn off the display

5.CD Select CD function PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM play

REPEAT REPEAT play A-B REPEAT A to B INTRO SCN AUTO MUSIC SCAN

5.CD Select CD function EDIT Edit the program TEXT Select TEXT display mode

TIME Select TIME display mode SCROLL Scroll the text display DIG OUT Turn the digital output on and off.

5.CD Select CD function NEXT DISC CD changer next disc PREV DISC CD changer previous disc

1-DISC-2

3-DISC-4

5-DISC- (Left) CD Changer DISC5*

5.CD Select CD function

- PITCH +

PITCH RST Reset the play speed

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* Tray OPEN/CLOSE

(Left) CD Changer DISC1* (Right) CD Changer DISC2* (Left) CD Changer DISC3* (Right) CD Changer DISC4*

(Left) Adjust the play speed down* (Right) Adjust the play speed up*

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX MODE / IPOD MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) ON and OFF POWER ON Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) ON POWER OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) OFF Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER Enters the setting MENU Call up the menu

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

6.AUX Select AUX function

5 / 6

MODE CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE REPEAT Select REPEAT PLAY SHUFFLE Select SHUFFLE PLAY

6.AUX Select AUX function ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST) ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM)

SONGS SORT ORDER (SONG) GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE) COMPOSER SORT ORDER (COMPOSER)

6.AUX Select AUX function PLAYLSIT SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST) PODCAST SORT ORDER (PODCAST)

AUDIOBOOK SORT ORDER (AUDIOBOOK)

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR1 MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER Enters the setting MENU Calls the menu EXIT Exits the programming menu CH + / - Select VCR channel

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9, +10 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function

5 / 6

EJECT Eject MEMO Enter a recording program TV/VCR Select TV/VCR 2 x PLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK SPEED

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED STILL STILL FRAME

OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING AUDIO Select AUDIO MODE SKIP SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function VIS+ VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT VIS- VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV MODE)

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off POWER ON Turns the TV on POWER OFF Turns the TV off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Display Programmable TV menu INFO OSD On/Off Cursor Move cursor on menus, etc. ENTER Conﬁ rm selection on menus, etc. MENU Display menu EXIT Exit menu MUTE Temporarily stop audio output and cancels INPUT Switch input PREV LAST CHANNEL function VOL +/- Adjust the TV sound level CH +/- Select channel 0-9, +10 Select TV channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Cancel various input

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

8.TV SELECT TV function MEMO Starts program ALT-CH LAST CHANNEL function

CH CALL SLEEP Sleep Timer VIDEO Switch TV to VIDEO function

8.TV SELECT TV function S-VIDEO Switch TV to S-VIDEO function

1 COMP 2

RGB Switch TV to RGB function HDMI/DVI Switch TV to HDMI/DVI function HDMI2 Switch TV to HDMI2 function

8.TV SELECT TV function ASPECT Select aspect ratio ZOOM Aspect Zoom

NORMAL Aspect Normal THROUGH Aspect Through FULL Aspect Full

8.TV SELECT TV function STANDARD Select Standard mode THEATER Select Theater mode

DYNAMIC Select Dynamic mode CINEMA Select Cinema mode PATTERN Focus Pattern on/off

8.TV SELECT TV function LIGHT Rear panel light on/off VMUTE ON VIDEO MUTE ON

VMUTE OFF VIDEO MUTE OFF

ChannelcallOn/off

(Left) Switch TV to COMPONENT1 function* (Right) Switch TV to COMPONENT2 function*

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

9.TAPE Select TAPE function

5 / 6

TAPE-A Select TAPE DECK A TAPE-B Select TAPE DECK B REC MUTE Insert blank during recording DIRECTION AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION

9.TAPE Select TAPE function COUNT RST COUNT RESET AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

BLANKSKIP Searches for an empty part TIME TIME DISPLAY mode TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR2 MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls the menu EXIT Exits the programming menu CH + / - Select VCR channel

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9, +10 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function

5 / 6

EJECT EJECT MEMO Enter a recording program TV/VCR Select TV/VCR 2 x PLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK SPEED VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED STILL STILL FRAME

OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING AUDIO Select AUDIO MODE SKIP SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function VIS+ VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT VIS- VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ PLASMA (PLASMA MODE)

FUNCTION

POWER ON Turns the PLASMA on POWER OFF Turns the PLASMA off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

< / > Scroll the page INFO OSD On/Off Cursor Move cursor on menus, etc. ENTER Conﬁ rm selection on menus, etc. MENU Display menu EXIT Exit menu MUTE Temporarily stop audio output and cancel INPUT Switch input VOL +/- Adjust the PLASMA sound level

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

PLASMA Select TV function VIDEO VIDEO input select HD/DVD HD/DVD input select

PC/RGB RGB input select ASPECT ASPECT select PIC MEMO Picture memory select PLASMA Select TV function COLOR TEMP Color temp PIC MODE Picture mode

AUTO ADJ Auto adjust on CONTRAST Call contrast adjustment BRIGHT Call brightness adjustment PLASMA Select TV function

- CONT + Contrast adjustment*

-BRIGHT+ Brightness adjustment*

-SHARP+ Sharpness adjustment*

-COLOR+ Color adjustment*

- TINT + Tint adjustment* PLASMA Select TV function POP ON SIDE BY SIDE on PIP ON PICTURE IN PICTURE on

SINGLE PIP/POP off

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

PLASMA Select TV function ID SELECT ID select M SCREEN Multi screen display

ID CLEAR ID clear ACTIV SEL Active screen select

1-VIDEO-2

PLASMA Select TV function 3-VIDEO- (Left) Select VIDEO3*

1DVD/HD2

3DVD/HD4

1PC/RGB2

3PC/RGB (Left) Select RGB3* PLASMA Select TV function NORMAL Select aspect NORMAL FULL Select aspect FULL

STADIUM Select aspect STADIUM ZOOM Select aspect ZOOM 14:9 Select aspect 14:9 PLASMA Select TV function

2.35:1 Select aspect 2.35:1 NORMAL Select picture mode NORMAL

1THEATER2

DEFAULT Select picture mode DEFAULT BRIGHT Select picture mode BRIGHT

(Left) Select VIDEO1* (Right) Select VIDEO2*

(Left) Select HD/DVD1* (Right) Select HD/DVD2* (Left) Select HD/DVD3* (Right) Select HD/DVD4* (Left) Select RGB1* (Right) Select RGB2*

(Left) Select picture mode THEATER1* (Right) Select picture mode THEATER2*

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD-R (CD-R MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD recorder on and off POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

CD-R Select CD function

5 / 6

INPUT Select INPUT SOURCE TR INCR Select INPUT SOURCE SYNC REC ACTIVATE SYNCRO RECORDING CD-R Select CD function PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT REPEAT PLAY A-B REPEAT A TO B INTRO SCN AUTO MUSIC SCAN CD-R Select CD function DISPLAY Turn off the display BLANK RECORDS BLANK

SCROLL scroll the text display

Play Skip forward or previous track RECORDING Stop Pause

(Left) REWIND (Right) FAST FORWARD TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the MD deck on and off POWER ON Turns the MD deck on POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

5 / 6

INPUT Select INPUT SOURCE MARKER Select AUTO MARKER SYNC REC SYNCRO REC MD PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT REPEAT PLAY EDIT Select EDIT mode SP/LP Select SP/LP mode MD TIME Select TIME mode CHAR Select CHARACTER mode

Play Skip forward or previous track RECORDING Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ BLU-RAY PLAYER (BLU-RAY MODE)

FUNCTION

POWER ON Turns the Blu-ray player on POWER OFF Turns the Blu-ray player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

< / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of disc EXIT RETURN TO MENU

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting BLUE, RED,

GREEN, YELLOW

Note:

If the BLUE, RED, GREEN, and YELLOW buttons on the BD8003 do not function correctly, perform Learning.

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

BLU-RAY

5 / 6

ANGLE Select ANGLE SUBTITLE Select SUB TITLE AUDIO Select LANGUAGES BLU-RAY ZOOM enlarge the picture on the screen SET UP Select SETUP MENU

MODE Change various menus P-DIRECT Select pure direct mode. DIMMER adjust the brightness of the front panel display BLU-RAY SEARCH Switch the SEARCH mode REPEAT REPEAT mode

A-B REPEAT A to B RANDOM RANDOM play

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

Select item on some BD menus

(left) REWIND (Right) FAST FORWARD Tray OPEN/CLOSE

OTHERS

CONTROLLING ZONES USING THE RC2001

The supplied RC2001 remote controller can be used for Zones. To use the remote controller for Zones, be sure to switch it to ZONE-A or ZONE-B mode.

ENGLISH

ZONE A (ZONE-A MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the ZONE A on and off POWER ON Turn the ZONE A on POWER OFF Turn the ZONE A off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Used to move the cursor, etc. ENTER Used to select items, etc. EXIT Used to return to the previous screen, etc. MUTE Decrease the sound temporarily for ZONE A VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level for ZONE A

4 / ¢

9 ;

Note:

Soft buttons on Page 5 and the 2, 4, ¢, 9, and ; buttons are only used for the NETWORK function.

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

ZONE-A Z.SPK-ON Turn on ZONE SPEAKER A Z.SPK-OFF Turn off ZONE SPEAKER A

ON/OFF Turn on/off ZONE SPEAKER A

- SPK VOL +

SPK MUTE Mute ZONE SPEAKER A ZONE-A DVD Set ZONE A function to DVD TV Set ZONE A function to TV

VCR1 Set ZONE A function to VCR1 DSS Set ZONE A function to DSS AUX Set ZONE A function to AUX ZONE-A TAPE Set ZONE A function to TAPE

CD Set ZONE A function to CD TUNER Set ZONE A function to TUNER NETWORK Set ZONE A function to NETWORK ZONE-A

AM FM

XM SR

P-SCAN Perform PRESET SCAN for the ZONE A tuner

-PRESET+

- TUNE +

ZONE-A

ALL-M RND

ALL-P RPT

ALL-V RES

- PAGE +

5 / 6

(Left) Decrease volume for ZONE SPEAKER A* (Right) Increase volume for ZONE SPEAKER A*

(Left) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to AM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to FM* (Left) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to XM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to SIRIUS*

(Left) Perform PRESET - for the ZONE A tuner* (Right) Perform PRESET + for the ZONE A tuner* (Left) Decrease the freqency for the ZONE A tuner* (Right) Increase the freqency for the ZONE A tuner*

(Left) Move to All Songs* (Right) RANDOM play* (Left) Move to All Photo* (Right) REPEAT play* (Left)Move to ALL Video* (Right) Select the resolution* (Left) Move to previous page* (Right) Move to next page* (Left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

ZONE B (ZONE-B MODE)

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the ZONE B on and off POWER ON Turn the ZONE B on POWER OFF Turn the ZONE B off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Used to move the cursor, etc. ENTER Used to select items, etc. EXIT Used to return to the previous screen, etc. MUTE Decrease the sound temporarily for ZONE B VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level for ZONE B

4 / ¢

9 ;

Note:

Soft buttons on Page 5 and the 2, 4, ¢, 9, and ; buttons are only used for the NETWORK function.

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

ZONE-B Z.SPK-ON Turn on ZONE SPEAKER B Z.SPK-OFF Turn off ZONE SPEAKER B

ON/OFF Turn on/off ZONE SPEAKER B

- SPK VOL +

SPK MUTE Mute ZONE SPEAKER B ZONE-B DVD Set ZONE B function to DVD TV Set ZONE B function to TV

VCR1 Set ZONE B function to VCR1 DSS Set ZONE B function to DSS AUX Set ZONE B function to AUX ZONE-B TAPE Set ZONE B function to TAPE

CD Set ZONE B function to CD TUNER Set ZONE B function to TUNER NETWORK Set ZONE B function to NETWORK ZONE-B

AM FM

XM SR

P-SCAN Perform PRESET SCAN for the ZONE B tuner

- PRESET +

- TUNE +

ZONE-B RANDOM RANDOM play REPEAT REPEAT play

ALL MUSIC Move to All Songs

5 / 6

(Left) Decrease volume for ZONE SPEAKER B (Right) Increase volume for ZONE SPEAKER B

(Left) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to AM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to FM* (Left) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to XM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to SIRIUS*

(Left) Perform PRESET - for the ZONE B tuner* (Right) Perform PRESET + for the ZONE B tuner* (Left) Decrease the freqency for the ZONE B tuner* (Right) Increase the freqency for the ZONE B tuner*

(Left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

RC2001 BUTTON SETTINGS

The Wizz.it 3 editor software can be used to make the settings for the IR Command, LINK, JUMP, One Touch Operation (Macro) and other functions in the RC2001. This enables a customized user interface, optimized for the customer’s environment, to be built. The Wizz.it 3 editor software can be downloaded from www.marantz.com. For more information about the setting procedures, see the PC Editor Software Wizz.it 3 User Guide.

This is the basic operation procedure for the RC2001.

Press the Home button to enter Home mode for

the RC2001.

Select the devices that are set in Home mode.

Perform operation of the device that you want

to control in the selected device mode.

To control another device, return to Home

mode and select another device.

The preinstalled default user ﬁ le is used to control Marantz products. The AV receiver device input switching code is assigned to the button next to the displayed device name of the device mode.

Example:

After DVD mode is selected in the remote controller, pressing the button next to DVD, shown in the ﬁ rst column in the LCD, transmits the AV receiver DVD input command.

SLEEP TIMER

The SLEEP TIMER is a function that sends a preset remote command after the sleep time has elapsed.

• The setting is made using the Wizz.it 3 editor, and the buttons that are assigned to the sleep timer are operated as shown below.

• This is a convenient function for devices that do not have a sleep timer or for setting the sleep timer using multiple devices.

• The RC2001 performs regular operation even when the sleep timer is activated.

Press the button that will be assigned to the

sleep timer. The message “PROCEED?” is displayed on the LCD.

Each time the button is pressed, the sleep

setting time changes in the cycle shown below.

PROCEED?

When the time that you want to set is display ed,

wait at the setting for three seconds.

• The sleep setting screen is no longer displayed on the LCD, and the sleep timer is automatically started.

And the sleep timer icon is displayed in Sub

Info area of the LCD.

• When the remaining time for the sleep timer setting is 10 minutes, the remaining time is displayed in the SubInfo area of the LCD.

SLEEP 30 SLEEP 60

SLEEP OFF SLEEP 120

SLEEP 90

MAIN MENU

The various settings for the remote device are made in the main menu.

ENTERING THE MAIN MENU

Press the Home button to enter Home mode for

the RC2001.

Hold down the Home button and Menu button

at the same time for three seconds to display MAIN MENU on the LCD.

1. LEARNING FUNCTION

Place the remote controller so that its infrared

signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about 0.05 m.

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

RC2001, and then press the button next to the “LEARNING” indicator .

The screen appears as shown below. Either

press the ENTER button or wait for three seconds.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

DVD input command for Marantz AV Receiver.

SLEEP TIMER icon

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

This screen changes to HOME mode. Press

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Note:

In Home mode, learning cannot be performed with the SOFT button using the procedure shown below. Use

OPERATION

the Wizz.it 3 editor to make any changes.

After selecting the device name, press the

BASIC

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

the button next to the displayed device name whose commands you want to learn.

button whose command you want to learn.

This enters the learning standby mode.

Press the remote controller button that you

want to have learn the command. Hold down the button until “LEARN OK” is displayed on the remote controller’s LCD.

Send the remote controller code that you want

to learn.

The remote controller has completed learning

when “LEARN OK” is displayed on the LCD.

• Pressing the ENTER button enables you to continue learning commands for another button in the same device mode.

• When the learning mode is completed, press the Home button three times to return the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Notes:

• If learning could not be performed, “LEARN ERROR” is displayed on the LCD. Try performing steps 5 to 6 again.

• The RC2001 can learn up to a maximum of 1,000 remote controller codes. Once 1,000 codes are programmed for learning, “LEARNFULL” is displayed on the LCD, and learning can no longer be performed.

To perform further learning, use the Wizz.it 3 editor

to delete any unneeded learning codes.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

• When making the learning settings, the “LEARN ERROR” message may occasionally be displayed repeatedly on the LCD. In some cases, this can be due to transmission of a special remote controller signal code. Learning cannot be performed when a special remote controller signal code is used.

ENGLISH

2. TIMER

The timer function of the RC2001 can be used to send a preset remote controller command at a programmed time. The Wizz.it 3 editor can be used to operate multiple devices. One Touch Operation (Macro) can also use the timer function for transmission.

Checking the Settings

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

RC2001, then press the button next to the “TIMER” indicator .

The TIMER menu is displayed. Pressing the

button next to the “CHECK” indicator on the LCD displays the timer settings.

When the LCD appears as shown below, the

timer has not been set.

Operation Settings

Press the button next to the “TIMER SET”

indicator in the LCD in the TIMER menu screen to display the timer programming setting screen.

Use the numer ic buttons (0 to 9) and cursor

buttons (t and u) to set the time for the timer. After making the setting, press the ENTER button.

Home mode is shown in the LCD. Select the

commands and devices for the commands that will be sent by timer programming.

• If a command assigned to the HARD button is to be sent by timer programming, press the HARD button when selecting the command to make the setting.

• If a command assigned to the SOFT button is to be sent by timer programming, use the < and > buttons when selecting the command to move the page, and select the command assigned to the SOFT button.

Press a button next to the “EVERYDAY” or

“ONE TIME” indicators on the LCD to set timer operation to either everyday or one-time only operation.

• The timer settings are displayed. Check that the settings are correct.

Setup time

Device name

HARD or SOFT button

Key name

EVERYDAY or ONE TIME

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds so that “COMPLETED” is displayed on the LCD and the operation settings are automatically completed.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the MAIN menu.

• Pressing the Home button from the TIMER MENU screen returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

The timer setting for the SOFT button cannot be used in Home mode.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the MAIN menu.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

Operation ON/OFF Settings

FUNCTION

Press the button next to the “ON/OFF” indicator

in the TIMER menu screen on the LCD to display the timer operation ON/OFF setting screen.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Press the button next to the “TIMER ON”

OPERATION

BASIC

(Enable) or “TIMER OFF” (Disable) indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable timer operation.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the MAIN menu.

• When timer operation is set to ON, the timer icon is displayed in the Sub Info area of the LCD.

24 TIMER icon

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

seconds so that “COMPLETED” is displayed on the LCD and the operation settings are

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

automatically completed.

ENGLISH

3. SYS.SETUP

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the RC2001, then press the button next to the “SYS.SETUP” indicator. The items below can be set in the SYS.SETUP screen.

• CLOCK (Clock setting)

• BACK LIGHT (Backlight illumination time setting)

• LCD (LCD setting)

• BEEP (Beep sound setting)

• MEM CLEAR (Initialization setting)

CLOCK (Clock setting)

This sets the clock for the RC2001.

Use the numer ic buttons (0 to 9) and cursor

buttons (t and u) to set the current time. After setting the correct time, press the ENTER button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed in

the LCD to indicate that the clock setting is completed.

BACK LIGHT (Bac klight illumination time setting)

Press the LIGHT button on the RC2001 to turn on the backlight, then set the time until the backlight turns off.

Press the button next to the “BACKLIGHT”

indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the backlight illumination time setting screen.

Press the buttons (right: +, left: -) display ed next

to TIME to set the illumination time. The time can be set in 1-second intervals from 0 to 60 seconds.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed on

the LCD to indicate that the illumination time setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

Setting the BACK LIGHT TIMER to 0 sec is equivalent to turning off the backlight so that the backlight does not turn on even when the LIGHT button is pressed.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

Press the button next to the “CLOCK” indicator

in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the clock setting screen.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Notes:

The clock can become out of sync over time. Please check it occasionally and set to the correct time if necessary.

The clock setting is not backed up when the battery pack is replaced. Please reset the time after replacing the battery pack.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

LCD (LCD setting)

FUNCTION

Press the button next to the “LCD” indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD. The LCD setting menu is displayed.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

• LCD TIMER (LCD timer setting)

This sets the time that the LCD remains on, after a button is pressed on the RC2001.

OPERATION

When there are no operations and the LCD is

BASIC

turned off, this setting enables power consumption to be reduced and the life of the battery pack to be extended. The default setting is 10 seconds.

The LCD setting menu is displayed, and so

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

press the button next to “LCD TIMER” in the LCD display.

Press the buttons (right: +, left: -) displayed

next to TIME to set the display time. The time can be set in 1-second intervals from 10 to 60 seconds.

To leave the LCD always on, press the button

next to the “ALWAYS ON’ indicator. However, please note that this setting will shorten the life of the battery pack.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

OTHERS

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed on

the LCD to indicate that the display time setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

If the LCD is turned off by the LCD timer, pressing any of the buttons on the remote controller will turn it on again. When the LCD is turned on, the pressed command is not activated.

To execute a command operation, press the button while the LCD is on.

• CONTRAST (LCD CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT)

This enables the LCD contrast to be adjusted. Adjust for maximum visibility according to your viewing environment.

The LCD setting menu is displayed, and so

press the buttons next to “CONTRAST” in the LCD display.

Press the side buttons (right: +, left: -) to adjust

the contrast level.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed

on the LCD to indicate that the setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

BEEP (Beep sound setting)

This sets the built-in beep sound in the RC2001.

Press the button next to the “BEEP” indicator

in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the beep setting screen.

Press the button next to the “ENABLE” or

“DISABLE” indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable the beep sound.

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

seconds so that “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” is displayed on the LCD and the settings are automatically completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS. SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

ENGLISH

MEM CLEAR (Initialization setting)

This returns the settings made in the RC2001 to their initial settings.

Press the button next to the “MEM CLEAR”

indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the initialization setting screen.

Press the button next to the “NO” (Disable) or

“YES” (Enable) indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable initialization.

Pressing the NO button automatically returns

the LCD to the SYS.SETUP menu.

Pressing the YES button displays

“COMPLETED” on the LCD and completes initialization.

The setting items that are initialized are shown

below.

• TIMER SETUP

• BACK LIGHT TIMER

• LCD

• BEEP

Note:

The LEARNING and CLOCK settings are not initialized.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

4. STATUS INDICATOR

This displays the settings made in the MAIN MENU and the status of the remote device.

Checking the status

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

RC2001, then press the button next to the “STATUS” indicator.

Pressing the ENTER button cycles through the

statuses of each of the items below.

• Remaining learning memory

• Remaining macro steps

• LCD timer setting

• Backlight timer setting

• Beep setting

• Firmware version

• Current clock time

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

seconds so that the LCD returns to the MAIN MENU.

5. RESET

If the RC2001 is not operating properly, use the procedure below to perform a reset (restart). Performing a reset does not erase the settings in the RC2001.

Remove the battery case cover.

Use a paper clip or other object to press the

reset button in the reset hole as shown in the ﬁ gure below to reset the RC2001.

Note:

Perform the reset with the battery pack loaded.

6. PROGRAMMABLE CODES

Number of Programmable Codes

This remote control has Flash memory 4M bit (512KB) that enables it to program remote control signals include the learned codes for up to 8000 codes. This number is for Marantz remote control codes. The actual number of codes may be less than 8000 depending on the type of the programmed remote control signals.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

Programmable Codes

This remote control may be unable to learn the codes for some A V equipment due to the code types, system, or other differences.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Zone A Zone B Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily. SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO

Zone D (Main zone control)

POWER ON/OFF Turns on or off for main zone of the unit.

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily. SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO

Turns on or off for each multi zone of the unit.

Selects a particular source component for each multi zone.

Adjusts the over all sound level for each multi zone.

Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for the multi zone.

Selects a particular source component for main zone.

Adjusts the over all sound level for Main zone.

Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for the main zone.

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired SOURCE button.

2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off MENU/INPUT Select the TV video input CH3/4 Selects TV channel up or down ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in TV menu

– – – – – – –

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD Player on and off MENU/INPUT Select the DVD menu CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE DVD changer next disc (*) A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in DVD menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward chapter/track Skips to previous chapter/track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR DECK (VCR1/ VCR2)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR deck on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in VCR menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ SATELLITE BROADCASTING TUNER (DSS)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF

MENU/INPUT Select the satellite tuner menu

CH3/4

ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Turns the satellite broadcasting tuner on and off

Selects satellite tuner channel up or down

Moves the cursor for setting in SATELLITE Broadcasting TUNER menu

Play (*) Stop (*) PAUSE (*) – – Searchs forward (*) Searchs backward (*)

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TUNER (T1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Tuner on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down 4(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down 2(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down 1(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE

A Selects AM mode B Selects FM mode C Selects XM mode D Selects DAB mode

Starts preset scan Stop preset scan – – – – – Selects the auto stereo mode or mono

mode

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Player on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) –

OPERATION

BASIC

9 ;

∞

6 5

OPERATION

ADVANCED

DISC+/T.MODE CD changer next disc (*) A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Recorder on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) – 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE CDR changer next disc A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLONG A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the tape deck on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) – 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Universal Dock on and off MENU/INPUT Call up the menu CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE Change the userinterface mode A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in Universal dock menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

NORMAL MODE

(

When operating Marantz AV equipment products

This remote controller is preset with a total of 12 types of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television), DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), TUNER 1, TUNER 2, CD , CD-R, TAPE (tape deck), AUX1 and AUX2. Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You can use these products without setting any codes.

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD. Pressing the SOURCE button once changes the remote control to the settings for the source that was pressed. To change the ampliﬁ er on other source, press the SOURCE button twice (double-click). The code is sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source changes to DVD.

SETTING THE BACK LIGHT

Each time press the buttons, illuminate button 2 seconds. To tur n off back light, press and hold down the SET and 4 button until SEND indicator blinks twice. T o turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and ¢ button until SEND indicator blinks twice. Initial is back light ON.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment products)

This remote controller is preset with remote control codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers. The preset codes are TV, DVD, CD and DSS. Settings can be made in one of two ways. When the preset codes are set, the following codes are contained in the source button of the remote controller.

Importants:

• Some codes may be not match your equipment. In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store these

)

codes.

• The preset codes do not cover full functions. If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to

store extra function.

• When the batteries are getting weak, the preset procedure is not successful.

PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button (ex TV) for the appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinks twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric keys for

appliance (code table at the end of this book) When the procedure is successful, the indicator will blink twice.

Note:

If the indicator did not blink twice, then repeat steps 1 through 2 and try entering the same code again.

SCANNING THE CODE TABLE

SEND

4. Stop when the appliance turns off. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

CHECKING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice then back light ﬂ ashes.

Press the INFO button.

The SEND indicator will blink twice.

T o view the code for ﬁ rst digit, press 1 once.

Count the SEND indicator blinks (e.g. 3 blinks =

3) and write down the number.

Note:

If a code digit is “0”, the SEND indicator will not blink.

Repeat step 3 three more times for remaining

digits. Use 2 for the second digit, 3 for the third digit, and 4 for the fourth digit.

RESETTING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice.

Then back light ﬂ ashes.

Press the below codes to reset.

TV : 1000 DVD : 2000 CD : 3000 DSS : 4000

The indicator will blink twice.

Note:

After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is set initial code.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

See the attached manufacturer number list for the preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and other settings.

Remote control source name

TV TV Television DVD DVD DVD player CD CD CD player DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

Corresponding preset code

Device name

tuner equipment

1. Switch on the appliance which should be controlled.

Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

Aim the remote controller at the appliance and

alternately press the CH+ and buttons slowly.

SOURCE ON

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

LEARN MODE

FUNCTION

This remote controller is capable of learning and storing codes used by other remote controls that you already own. For codes which are not learned, the remote controller will transmit either the Marantz preset

CONNECTIONS SETUP

codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the customer. The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is located at the top of the remote controller.

Notes:

• This remote controller is capable to learn around 60 codes.

• When the batteries are getting weak , the learing procedure is not successful.

LEARNING PROCEDURE

1. Place the remote controller so that its infrared

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about 5 cm.

5 cm

SYSTEM REMOTE CO

NTROLLER

2. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/ INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

4. Select the button to be learned.

• LEARN indicator lights up.

When the following key learned

• SOURCE buttons

The lear ning function is unavailable for all

SOURCE buttons in any mode.

• POWER ON button

• POWER OFF button

• VOL +/- button

• MUTE button

• INFO button

• SLEEP button

The above keys are common use in each

device mode. It can be learned in TV mode.

Press and hold the button of the original remote

controller to learn until the SEND indicator blinks twice.

• When the SEND indicator blinks once, repeat this step.

• When the memory of the RC101 is full, the LEARN and SEND indicators blink once. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons in

same SOURCE.

Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other SOURCE.

When you have finished programming the

remote controller, press the SET button, then LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from the LEARN mode.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.

Erasing the code by buttons

Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Select the SOURCE button to select the button to be erased.

3. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and press the learned button twice to be erased.

• SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode

returns to LEARN mode.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET button.

Erasing the code by SOURCE

1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Erasing the all SOURCES

Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the

mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not

press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

3. Select the SOURCE button to select the SOURCE.

OTHERS

Notes:

• When the SEND indicator blinks once again, the transmitting code is unavailable for RC101, or the transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode, the remote controller automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and

press the learned SOURCE button twice to be erased.

• LEARN indicator lights.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Note:

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.

ENGLISH

CLONE MODE

Creating copies using clone mode

All of the codes programmed to the RC101 remote controller can be copied to another RC101 using a few simple operations.

• The remote controller can copy the entire contents.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed codes are copied.

Note:

The clone function can only be used for copying when using the same model (RC101) for both the transmitting and receiving remote controller.

Copying entire contents

1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote controller (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the transmitting remote controller (top) at a distance of about 5 cm.

OLLE R

TE CONT O M

SYSTEM RE

5 cm

SYSTEM REM

O TE CONT

ROLLER

2. Press SET button and PLAY button of the

transmitting remote controller until the SEND indicator blinks twice.

4. Press the ENTER cursor button on the receiving

remote controller.

Then back lights tune off.

5. Press the ENTER cursor button on the

transmitting remote controller.

Then backlights tune off.

6. When copying is started, the SEND indicator of

transmitting remote controller and the LEARN indicator of receiving remote controller start to blink.

When the copying operation is completed, the

back lights of transmitting remote controller and receiving remote controller are turned on.

Do not touch either of the remote controls

during the copying operation. Doing so could cause copying to fail.

If the copying fails in the middle of the copying

process, back light of receiving remote are flash. Press the SET button to return the normal mode. Check and perform steps 1 to 5 again.

Copying takes about 30 seconds to complete

when the transmitting remote controller has been programmed to 100% capacity.

OTHER OPERATIONS

CHANGE THE ZONE CONTROL COMMANDS FOR EACH ZONE

(When operating the unit by Multi Zone connected)

• Zone A (Default)

• Zone B

• Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

• Zone D (MAIN ZONE)

Change the control commands for each zone.

1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the

SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press each zone button(A/B button)

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of each zone.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

CHANGE THE CONTROL COMMANDS OF ZONE SPEAKER FUNCTION FROM ZONE.

1. Press SET button and POWER ON button until

the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 1-digit code by numeric keys.

• Zone mode: 1 (Default)

• Zone speaker mode: 2

Note

In case of Zone D, only control for main zone is possible.

3. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of zone mode or zone speaker mode.

Note

The control commands can be set independently in ZONE A/B.

POWER ON/OFF

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

Then backlight ﬂ ashes The transmitting side is now ready.

3. Press SET button and STOP button of the

receiving remote controller until the LEARN indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes. The receiving side is now ready.

7. Once copying is completed, press the SET

button on both remote controls.

VOL +/– MUTE

INFO

Tuner mode operation remote code (Refer to page

75)

SLEEP

TROUBLESHOOTING

VOL +/– MUTE

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

SETUP CODES (RC101)

Acer ...................................................................................1141

Admiral .........................................................1002, 1009, 1089

Aiko ................................................................................... 1059

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Aiwa ......................................................................... 1117, 1118

Akai ................................................................................... 1001

Amtron .............................................................................. 1023

Anam .................................................................................1113

Anam National .............................................. 1023, 1069, 1092

AOC .....................................................1003, 1024, 1049, 1127

Audiovox ........................................................................... 1023

Bell & Howell ..........................................................1009, 1025

Benq ........................................................................1104, 1142

Broksonic .............................................1003, 1097, 1098, 1113

Celebrity ........................................................................... 1001

Citizen ........................................................... 1003, 1013, 1023

1026, 1059, 1063

OPERATION

Colortyme ............................................................... 1003, 1043

BASIC

Contec ...............................................................................1113

Contec/Cony ................................................. 1023, 1045, 1047

Craig ....................................................1020, 1022, 1023, 1113

Crown ..................................................................... 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes ...............................................1003, 1013, 1025

1026, 1062, 1103, 1110

OPERATION

ADVANCED

Daewoo ..............................................1003, 1013, 1024, 1035

1036, 1059, 1084, 1101

Daytron ......................................................... 1003, 1013, 1016

Dimensia ..................................................................1103, 1110

Dumont ..........................................................1003, 1010, 1153

Electroband ...................................................................... 1001

CONTROLLER

Electrohome ........................................1001, 1003, 1069, 1133

REMOTE

Emerson ....................................................... 1003, 1013, 1015

1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 1025, 1038, 1044, 1045 1048, 1055, 1061, 1094 1096, 1099, 1101, 1113

TROUBLESHOOTING

Envision ............................................................................ 1003

Fisher ...................................................1025, 1051, 1091, 1160

Fujitsu .................................................. 1038, 1124, 1125, 1155

Funai ..............................................................1023, 1038, 1113

Gateway ............................................................................1150

GE .....................................................1003, 1018, 1022, 1046

1054, 1069, 1085, 1103 1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153

OTHERS

Goldstar ........................................................ 1003, 1013, 1024

1030, 1045, 1080  1100, 1112, 1154

Hallmark ........................................................................... 1003

Hisense ..............................................................................1116

Hitachi ................................................. 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032

1037, 1041, 1045, 1047 1065, 1068, 1082, 1088 1094, 1139, 1140, 1145, 1159

Inﬁ nity ............................................................................... 1067

Janeil .................................................................................1134

JBL ................................................................................... 1067

JC Penney .................................................... 1003, 1013, 1018

1019, 1024, 1026 1046, 1047, 1054 1063, 1083, 1085 1100, 1103, 1110 1112, 1133, 1154

Jensen .............................................................................. 1003

JVC ............................................................... 1028, 1029, 1045

1047, 1050, 1060, 1065

Kawasho ................................................................. 1001, 1003

Kenwood ........................................................................... 1003

Kloss Novabeam .................................1023, 1056, 1057, 1134

KTV ............................................................... 1013, 1023, 1033

1034, 1073, 1099, 1113

LG ........................................................................... 1024, 1030

M.Wards ....................................................... 1002, 1009, 1038

Magnavox ..................................................... 1003, 1052, 1053

1056, 1057, 1063 1067, 1081, 1106

Marantz ................................................1003, 1031, 1067, 1122

Mitsubishi ...................................................... 1003, 1024, 1051

1115, 1122, 1133

Motorola .................................................................. 1014, 1069

NEC .......................................... 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069

NET-TV ....................................................................1137, 1150

Orion ....................................................................... 1020, 1096

Panasonic .................................. 1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111

Philips ..................................................1003, 1011, 1045, 1052

1054, 1056, 1057, 1058 1063, 1067, 1069, 1106

Pioneer ......................................................... 1003, 1018, 1037

1070, 1071, 1094 1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync .........................................................................1135

Portland .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059

Price Club ......................................................................... 1026

Prism ................................................................................ 1018

Proscan ..............................................1004, 1005, 1006, 1007

1008, 1085, 1103, 1110

Proton ..................................................................... 1003, 1045

Quasar ....................................... 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153

Radio Shack ................................................. 1003, 1013, 1015

1023, 1024, 1025, 1045 1100, 1103, 1110, 1113

RCA .............................................................. 1003, 1004, 1005

1006, 1007, 1008 1014, 1024, 1049, 1069 1075, 1079, 1085, 1087 1088, 1093, 1094, 1101 1103, 1110, 1113, 1153

Realistic .............................................. 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025

1045, 1100, 1103, 1110

Runco ......................................................................1010, 1153

Sampo ...............................................................................1150

Samsung ............................................1003, 1013, 1024, 1026

1040, 1045, 1062, 1078 1083, 1090, 1100, 11051114 1120, 1121, 1146, 1148, 1157

Sansui ................................................................................1119

Sanyo .................................................1003, 1025, 1051, 1072

1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158

Sharp ............................................................ 1003, 1013, 1014

1015, 1045, 1055, 1064 1066, 1076, 1089, 1123

Signature .......................................................................... 1009

Sony ..............................................................1001, 1102, 1108

Soundesign ................................1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113

Starlite .............................................................................. 1023

Supre-Macy .......................................................................1134

Sylvania ........................................................ 1003, 1039, 1042

1052, 1053, 1056, 1057 1063, 1067, 1089, 1151

Symphonic .................................................... 1023, 1039, 1044

Tandy ................................................................................ 1014

Tatung ............................................................................... 1069

Technics ............................................................................ 1018

Techwood ............................................................... 1003, 1018

Teknika ............................................... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023

1024, 1026, 1038, 1045 1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113

Telecaption ....................................................................... 1074

Toshiba .........................................................1003, 1019, 1025

1026, 1042, 1074, 1098 1107, 1111, 1135, 1136

Totevision .......................................................................... 1013

Universal ................................................................. 1046, 1054

Video Concepts .................................................................1113

Viewsonic ......................................................1006, 1022, 1109

1128, 1129, 1130, 1131 1138, 1143, 1145, 1150

Wards ........................................................... 1003, 1009, 1015

1024, 1038, 1044, 1046 1052, 1054, 1056, 1057 1067, 1086, 1103, 1110

White Westinghouse ................................................1001, 1101

Yamaha ..................................................................1003, 1024

Zenith ............................................................ 1003, 1009, 1010

1132, 1144, 1153

AIWA ............................................................. 3001, 3002, 3003

AKAI .............................................................3004, 3005, 3006

AUDIO ............................................................................. 3007

AUDIO LABS .................................................................... 3008

CALIFORNIA .................................................................... 3008

CARVER ........................................................3010, 3011, 3009

CASIO .................................................................... 3012, 3020

CURTIS .................................................................. 3020, 3012

DENON ............................................................................. 3013

EMERSON ....................................................................... 3014

FISHER .....................................3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

GE .................................................................................... 3019

GENEXXA .................................................... 3014, 3021, 3020

HARMON ...................................................... 3022, 3023, 3051

HITACHI ...........................................................................3020

INKEL ............................................................................... 3024

JC PENNEY .................................................3012, 3020, 3025

JVC ......................................................................... 3026, 3027

KARDON ...................................................... 3022, 3051, 3023

KENWOOD ......................................... 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031

3032, 3033

KRELL .............................................................................. 3010

LUXMAN ............................................. 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

LX I ............................................................... 3012, 3020, 3014

MAGNAVOX ................................................. 3010, 3039, 3040

MARANTZ .......................................... 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

MATHES ................................................................. 3012, 3020

MCS ........................................................................ 3012, 3020

MGA ..................................................................................3023

MISSION .......................................................................... 3010

MITSUBISHI ........................................................... 3023, 3044

NAD ........................................................................ 3034, 3045

NAKAMICHI .................................................. 3046, 3047, 3048

NEC MCS ......................................................................... 3025

NIKKO .................................................................... 3007, 3016

ONKYO ............................................... 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052

3055, 3098

OPTIMUS ..................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3053

3054, 3056, 3057, 3058, 3059

PANASONIC ................................................. 3008, 3060, 3061

ENGLISH

PHILIPS .............................................. 3009, 3010, 3010, 3040

PIONEER .................................3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064

QUASAR .......................................................................... 3008

RCA ...........................................3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067

3068, 3069

REALISTIC ..........................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3042

3054, 3057

ROTEL .............................................................................. 3010

RS ORIGINAL ..................................................................3070

SAE ........................................................................ 3010, 3083

SAMSUNG ....................................................................... 3071

SANSUI .............................................. 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

SANYO ......................................3011, 3018, 3074, 3075, 3076

SCOTT ............................................................................. 3014

SEARS .....................................3012, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3042

SHARP ......................................................... 3028, 3042, 3077

SHERWOOD ............................ 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078, 3024

SHURE ............................................................................. 3025

SONY .............................3039, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3097

SYLVANIA ......................................................................... 3010

SYMPHONIC .................................................................... 3083

TEAC ........................................ 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084

3085, 3086

TECHNICA ............................... 3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088

THETA DIGITAL ................................................................ 3040

TOSHIBA .......................................................................... 3045

VICTOR ............................................................................ 3026

YAMAHA ................................... 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091, 3092

ZENITH ..................................... 3016, 3093, 3094, 3095, 3096

DVD

Aiwa ........................................................................ 2036, 2037

Apex ...............................2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034

BOSE ...................................................................... 2038, 2039

Denon ..................................................................... 2047, 2048

Funai ................................................................................. 2049

GE ......................................................2009, 2020, 2029, 2033

Harman Kardon ................................................................ 2061

Hitachi ........................................................... 2008, 2012, 2031

JVC ............................................................... 2006, 2010, 2040

2041, 2042, 2043

Kenwood ................................................................. 2053, 2054

Koss .................................................................................. 2058

Magnavox ............................................2007, 2011, 2023, 2025

Marantz ............................................................................. 2025

Mitsubishi .................................................................2011, 2015

Onkyo ............................................................................... 2062

Oritron ..................................................................... 2009, 2030

Panasonic ........................................... 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

Philips ............................................................2007, 2011, 2058

Pioneer ......................................................... 2002, 2014, 2056

Proscan ........................................................2009, 2020, 2032

RCA .......................................... 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057

Sampo .............................................................................. 2041

Samsung ..................................2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027

Sanyo ..................................................................... 2050, 2052

Sharp ...................................................................... 2044, 2045

Sherwood ......................................................................... 2051

Sony .............................................................2001, 2013, 2059

Toshiba ...............................................2004, 2008, 2026, 2028

Yamaha ..................................................................2046, 2060

Zenith ................................................................................ 2010

DSS

Alphastar .......................................................................... 4027

BSB .................................................................................. 4021

Chaparral .......................................................................... 4039

DIRECTV ................................................................ 4001, 4016

DISH Network ................................................................... 4030

Drake ................................................................................ 4026

Echostar ...................................4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020

Express Vu ....................................................................... 4017

Fujitsu ............................................................................... 4025

GE ................................................................4002, 4008, 4009

General Instruments ............................................... 4036, 4037

Hitachi ..................................................................... 4001, 4015

Hughes ................................................................... 4001, 4016

Janeil ................................................................................ 4025

JVC ................................................................................... 4017

Mitsubishi .......................................................................... 4001

Panasonic ............................................................... 4004, 4010

Philips ..................................................................... 4031, 4035

Proscan ...............................................4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

Radio Shack ........................................................... 4036, 4037

RCA .................................................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

Realistic ............................................................................ 4040

Rural Cable ....................................................................... 4036

Samsung ................................................................ 4022, 4027

Sony .............................................................4003, 4012, 4014

Star Choice ....................................................................... 4032

Star Trak ........................................................................... 4024

STS ................................................................................... 4038

SuperDish ......................................................................... 4028

Toshiba ................................................................... 4001, 4034

Uniden .......................................................... 4005, 4006, 4013

Video Pall .........................................................................4025

Zenith ...................................................................... 4025, 4033

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:

1. Are the connections made properly ?

2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?

3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ?

CONNECTIONS SETUP

If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following tab le . If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

This unit cannot be turned up. The power plug is not connected.

No sound and picture are output even when power is on.

OPERATION

BASIC

No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the

Incorrect Audio or Video for selected source.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

Incorrect Audio from a channel.

No Audio output from the center channel speaker.

CONTROLLER

Mute is on.

The input or power amp are not connected correctly.

The master volume control is turned all the way down.

The function selector position is wrong.

headphone jack.

Input cable connected incorrectly.

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

REMOTE

Center = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

No Audio output from the surround speakers.

TROUBLESHOOTING

No Audio output from the surround back speakers.

OTHERS

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

Surround = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.

Surround back = NONE has been selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Connect the power plug to the outlet.

Cancel mute using the remote controller.

See the connection diagram and connect the cables correctly.

Adjust the master volume.

Select correct position.

Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not output sound when headphones are connected.)

Connect the cable correctly by referring to the connection diagram.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the center speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

When STEREO has been selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the surround speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

Set surround mode EX/ES.

Make the correct setting.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been

Can not select Pro Logic IIx mode.

Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible.

Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible.

No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected in

Noise is produced during DTSencoded CD or laser disc play.

A specific channel does not produce output.

FM or

AM reception fails. Antenna connection is incomplete.

Noise is heard during AM reception.

Noise is heard during FM reception.

Cannot get programmed station when the PRESET button is pressed.

Control with the remote controller fails.

Auto Setup (SPEAKER SETUP) is not working.

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Input signal is incompatible.

SETUP mode.

Analog has been selected for input.

Nothing recorded on source.

Reception is affected by other electrical ﬁ elds.

The radio waves from the broadcasting station are weak.

Preset data has been erased.

Batteries are consumed.

The remote controller mode is incorrect

The distance between this unit and the remote commander is too far.

Something is blocking the unit and the remote commander.

Headphones are connected.

Make the correct setting.

Use 5.1channel source.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Use 2 channel DTS input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Select Subwoofer = YES.

Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital input, then play.

Check the encoded channel on the source side.

Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas to FM and AM antenna outlets.

Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna is set up.

Install an FM outdoor antenna.

Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time will erase preset data. If that happens, input the preset data again.

Replace all the batteries with new ones.

Switch the remote controller to the mode used for the component to be controlled.

Move closer to this unit.

Remove offending object.

Disconnect the headphones.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

HDMI

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The display does not appear over an HDMI connection.

The connected monitor or projector does not support HDCP.

The HDMI input of on the TV is not on. Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as explained in the

The HDMI output on the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not on.

The HDMI mode is not correctly set on the unit.

The HDMI output video resolution of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) does not match the TV speciﬁ cations.

The device is connected with a nonstandard HDMI cable.

Power to the unit is off. (When the unit is on standby, HDMI connections cannot be turned on.)

A video signal is not output except when using an HDCP-compatible device. Either connect to an HDCP-compatible device or use analog video connections.

TV's instruction manual.

Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT SETUP menu as explained on page 23.

Set the resolution so that it matches, as explained in the instruction manuals of both components.

A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to ensure stable operation and prevent image quality deterioration.

Turn on the power to the unit.

PROTECTIVE FEATURE

In some cases, the STANDBY indicator may blink slowly, twice per second. In this case, turn off the unit, unplug the power cord, and check the following points.

• Make sure the speaker cables are not reversed and connected to the wrong sides (+ and -) on the unit.

• Make sure the speaker cables connected to the unit are not shorted. (Check both the unit end and the speaker end.)

• Make sure the volume does not exceed the level that the unit is capable of producing.

• When using the unit in a rack or other enclosed space, heat may build up inside the unit and cause a ﬁ re. When installing the unit, be sure to leave sufﬁ cient space between the top, back and both sides of the unit and walls or other AV components to prevent the internal temperature from rising.

After checking these points, plug in the power cord and use the remote controller to turn on the unit. Turn down the volume before resuming playback. Confirm that there are no problems with the speaker connections and playback performance.

If this symptom recurs, request service at your nearest service center.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

THX

DIRECT

PHONES

FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT

To lock all front panel buttons (except the POWER ON/OFF button) and the INPUT SELECTER and VOLUME knobs, hold the A UTO and EXIT b uttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time, “F-KEY LOCK!” is displayed. To unlock the controls, press the same buttons again simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time, “F-KEY UNLOCK” is displayed, and the buttons are released.

GENERAL MALFUNCTION

If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has corrupted the information in the equipment memory

EXIT TOPZONEAUTO

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

EXIT

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

circuits. Theref ore:

Time is needed for the display of an HDMI connection to appear.

Audio is not played back over an HDMI connection.

DVD-Audio is not played back over an HDMI connection.

The connection between HDMI components was not authenticated.

The connection is being authenticated between the HDMI devices.

The HDMI audio output of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not on.

The signal format of the source component (DVD, Set Top Box, etc.) is not supported by the unit.

This unit is set to the HDMI audio “THROUGH” mode.

The DVD player does not support CPPM, therefore it cannot output HDMI audio.

Shut off and then turn the power back on to the unit, TV and source component.

There is nothing wrong with the system. Some HDMI devices require time for authentication.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns on, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it can connect to the unit, as explained in the source component's instruction manual.

In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not produced from the unit. Set it to “ENABLE”. (see page 34)

• Use a DVD-Audio player that supports CPPM.

• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD player.

• Use an analog connection.

In rare instances, the unit may enter standby mode and the STANDBY indicator may blink rapidly, 8 times per second. In this case, unplug the power cord and request service at your nearest service center.

- disconnect the plug from the AC line supply

- after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect the plug to the AC line supply

- re-attempt to operate the equipment

Memory backup

• In case a power outage occurs or the power cord is accidentally unplugged, this unit is equipped with a backup function to prevent memory data such as the preset memory from being erased.

HOW TO RESET THE UNIT

Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal, reset the unit with the following procedure. This unit is turned on, press and hold the ZONE + TOP buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds or more. Remember that the procedure will reset the settings

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time, TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.

Note:

The NETWORK function setting cannot be reset. For information on resetting the NETWORK function setting, see the NETWORK User Guide.

OTHERS

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

O THERS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FM TUNER SECTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Frequency Range ................................ 87.5 – 108.0 MHz

Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf

Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB

Distortion ......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %

Stereo Separation .........................................1 kHz 45 dB

Alternate Channel Selectivity .................± 300 kHz 60 dB

Image Rejection .........................................98 MHz 70 dB

Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, ± 75 kHz Dev 800 mV

AM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................... 531 – 1602 kHz

Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................. 50 dB

Usable Sensitivity .........................................Loop 400µV

Distortion ...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %

Selectivity .................................................± 20 kHz 70 dB

AUDIO SECTION

OPERATION

Input Sensitivity/Impedance

BASIC

(Unbalanced) .............................200 mV/ 47 k ohms

(Balanced) ..................................400 mV/ 30 k ohms

Output Level/Impedance

(Unbalanced) ....................................1 V/ 470 ohms

(Balanced) ......................................... 2 V/ 470 ohms

Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) .... 105 dB

Frequency Response

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(Analog Input / Pure Direct)

........................................... 8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB)

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)

............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB)

VIDEO

Television Format ............................................ NTSC/PAL

CONTROLLER

Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms

REMOTE

Output Level/Impedance ......................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)

Video Frequency (Component)

..5 Hz to 100 MHz (– 3 dB)

S/N .......................................................................... 60 dB

HDMI

TROUBLESHOOTING

Version .........................................................1.3a [INPUT]

.........................................................1.3a [OUTPUT]

GENERAL

Power Requirement ...........................AC 230 V 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption ................................................85 W

Standby Power Consumption .................. (Normal) 1.0 W

......................................................(Economy) 0.7 W

Weight ...................................................................11.6 kg

OTHERS

ACCESSORIES

Remote Controller RC2001 ........................................... 1

Remote Controller RC101 ............................................. 1

Microphone .................................................................... 1

AAA-size alkaline batteries ............................................ 4

AAA-size dry batteries ................................................... 2

FM Antenna ................................................................... 1

AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1

AC cable ........................................................................ 1

USB cable ...................................................................... 1

DIMENSIONS

440 mm

AV PRE TUNER AV800 3

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

EXIT

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

Speciﬁ cations subject to change without prior notice.

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

8 mm360 mm

385 mm

17 mm

184.5 mm

14 mm 170.5 mm

ENGLISH

DESCRIPTION

THX® is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned ﬁ lm production company, Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. THX resulted from George Lucas’ desire to reproduce the movie soundtrack as faithfully as possible both in the movie theater and in the home theater. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from a movie theater environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. When the THX mode of the unit is on, three distinct THX technologies are automatically added: Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie in a home environment. These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for this and prevents the soundtracks from being overly bright and harsh when played in a home theater . Timbre Matching-ﬁ lters the information going to the surround speakers so they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel.

This expands the listening position and creates with only two surround speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater with multiple surround speakers. The unit was required to pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests, in addition to incorporating the technologies explained above, in order to be THX certiﬁ ed. THX requirements cover ev ery aspect of performance including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all beneﬁ t from the THX mode when being viewed. The THX mode should only be activated when watching movies which were originally produced for a movie theater environment.

THX need not be activated for music, movies made especially for TV, or shows such as spor ts programming, talk shows, etc. This is because they were originally mixed for a small room environment.

THX Surround EX—Dolby DIgital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front r ight, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever bef ore . Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology an be found at www .thx.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.

“SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.

The THX Ultra2 specification provides uncompromised 7.1 channel playback of any multichannel program, whether movie soundtracks or music over the widest possible seating area. There are an additional two processing’s for THX Ultra2 as bellow .

A.S.A. (Advanced Speaker Array)

“ASA” is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 surround and 2 surround back speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer), placing the two Surround Back speak ers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker distance, which will re-optimize the surround sound-ﬁ eld. ASA is used in two new surround modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music Mode and THX Games mode.

B.G.C. (Boundary Gain Compensation)

If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons) results in most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufﬁ ciently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes “boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation) feature to provide an improved bass balance. BGC can be selected by choosing “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer-Yes” from the “Boundary Gain Compensation” section of the “THX Audio setup menu”.

Neural-THX® Surround has been chosen as the ofﬁ cial surround sound broadcast format for leading FM/HD and satellite radio and television stations worldwide. Neural-THX Surround delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100% compatible with stereo.

Neural-THX Surround draws the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals and ambience that are typically masked by other playbac k systems. This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before for both surround encoded material and regular stereo material such as CDs or digital media players. Neural-THX Surround: Taking Surround to the Next Level.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. Marantz hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, nontransferable, limited right of use to this product under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,003,467; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, DTS Digital Surround, ES, and Neo:6 are registered trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS 96/24 are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS , Inc. All Rights Reserved.

• dts Digital Surround

DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels of discrete digital audio into home theater systems. DTS brings you premium quality discrete multichannel digital sound to both movies and music. DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to create full range digital sound reproduction.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

The no compromise DTS digital process sets the

FUNCTION

standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering an exact copy of the studio master recordings to neighborhood and home theaters. Now, e v ery moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as the moviemaker intended. DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either mo vies or

CONNECTIONS SETUP

music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.

• dts Neo:6

The advantages of discrete multichannel systems over matrix are well known. But even in homes equipped f or discrete multichannel, there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding. This is because of the large library of matrix surround motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape; and analog television broadcasts. The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center channel and a mono surround channel from twochannel matrix stereo material. It is better than a simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to improve separation, but because of its mono, band-

OPERATION

limited surround it can be disappointing to users

BASIC

accustomed to discrete multichannel. Neo:6 offers several important improvements as

follow,

• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users

ADVANCED

with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and ﬁ ve separate channels, respectively, corresponding to the standard home-theater speaker layouts .

• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements within a channel or channels to be steered separately, and in a way which follows naturally from the original presentation.

REMOTE

• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo nonmatrix recordings into the ﬁ ve- or six-channel layout, in a wa y which does not diminish the subtlety and integrity of the original stereo recording.

• dts Digital Surround ES

TROUBLESHOOTING

DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTSES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360degree surround impression and space expression thanks to further expanded surround signals. This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since 1999. In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,

OTHERS

SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES Extended Surround includes two signal formats with different surround signal recording methods, as DTSES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.

• dts Digital Surround 96/24

The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at

44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24bit for some time, and there is increasing interest in higher sampling rates both for recording and for delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency response and the use of antialias and reconstruction ﬁ lters with more favorable aural characteristics.

DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video titles. When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in two channels, and with serious limitations on picture. This capability has had little use. DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a new player is needed, and only analog outputs are provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters and analog electronics provided in the player.

DTS 96/24 offers the following:

1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master.

2. Full backward compatibility with all existing decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz signal)

3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio, accessible to all D VD players.

4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video, for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

DTS-HD Master Audio is capable of delivering audio that is a bit-for-bit identical to the studio master. DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio at super high variable bit rates -24.5 mega-bits per second (Mbps) on Blu-ray discs and 18.0 Mbps on HD-DVD - that are signiﬁ cantly higher than standard DVDs . This bit stream is so “fast” and the transfer rate is so “high” that it can deliver the Holy Grail of audio: 7.1 audio channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depths that are identical to the original. With DTS-HD Master Audio, you will be able to experience movies and music, exactly as the artist intended: clear, pure, and uncompromised.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can deliver up to 7.1 channels of sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio delivers audio at high constant bit rates superior to standard DVDs---6.0 Mbps on Blu-ray discs and 3.0 Mbps on HD-DVD to produce outstanding sound quality. It is capable of delivering up to 7.1 channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depth resolution. It allows content creators to deliver rich, high deﬁ nition audio on movies where disc space may not allow for DTS-HD Master Audio.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio and DTS-HD High Res Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Dolby Digital identiﬁ es the use of Dolby Digital audio coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV. As with ﬁ lm sound, Dolby Digital can provide up to ﬁ ve full-range channels for left, center, and r ight screen channels, independent left and right surround channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency effects.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoding technology that provides better spatiality and directionality on Dolby Surround program material; provides a convincing three-dimensional soundﬁ eld on conventional stereo music recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience to automotive sound. While conventional surround programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround

is an improved matrix

Pro Logic encoded speciﬁ cally to take full advantage of Pro Logic surround channels. (Such material is also compatible with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)

Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives three surround channels from the two in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX.

About Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience to the home theater environment. A product of Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a complete surround sound solution that maximizes the entertainment experience from stereo as well as

5.1-channel encoded sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby

Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally decode the thousands of commercially available Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and television programs with enhanced depth and spatiality. It can also process any high-quality stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening experience.

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a surround sound listening experience over headphones. When listening to multichannel content such as DVD movies over headphones, the listening experience is fundamentally different than listening to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.

decoders, soundtracks will be able to be

playback, including separate left and right

ENGLISH

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized surround sound experience from two speakers using a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic II. Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original Multichannel audio information and provides the listener with the sensation of being surrounded by additional speakers.

Dolby® TrueHD is Dolby’s next-generation lossless technology developed for high-deﬁ nition disc-based media. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on next-generation discs. When coupled with high-deﬁ nition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience that lets you enjoy sound as stunning as the high-deﬁ nition picture.

Dolby Digital Plus is a highly sophisticated and versatile audio codec based on Dolby Digital and designed specifically to adapt to the changing demands of future audio, video delivery, and audio storage systems while simultaneously retaining backwards compatibility with the existing Dolby Digital 5.1-channel home theater systems in use today.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the doub le-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a listening environment that places the listener “inside” music performances and dramatically improves both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear channels to greatly improve separation and image positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to both audio and A/V productions. CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog to become clearer and more discernable in movies and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the original programming to more closely achieve low frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations of the speakers by full octave.

Circle Surround II, SRS and trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround II is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

HDCD® (High Deﬁ nition Compatible Digital ®) is a patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the full richness and details of the original microphone feed. HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as compared to 16-bits for all other CDs. HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD format by using a sophisticated system to encode the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining completely compatible with the CD format. When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the original performance not a ﬂ at, digital imitation.

symbol are

HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the United States 5,479,168 5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600 5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with other patents pending. “Microsoft, HDCD, and the HDCD logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and / or other countries.”

HDMI, the and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

There are several f actors that can degrade the sound from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One of the most important is the interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as walls, the ﬂ oor, and the ceiling in the room. Even with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical treatments, there are signiﬁ cant problems that are caused by room acoustics. These include reﬂ ections from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are created between large parallel surfaces in the room. In a home theater the situation is further complicated because there are several listening locations. The effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at each person’s ears are very different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded in a different way for e v ery person in the room. It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz. The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the room. Because the room causes variations in the frequency response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it is important to measure each loudspeaker at several locations in the listening room. This should be done even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a single location is not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only technology that can achieve room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so by combining the data collected at several points in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception (known as psychoacoustics).

Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional methods of room equalization. In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a wide listening area, Audysse y MultEQ provides a completely automated sound system set-up process. It identiﬁ es how many loudspeakers are connected to the ampliﬁ ers and whether they are fullrange, satellites, or subwoofers . If there is a least one subwoofer connected, Audysse y MultEQ determines the optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired outof-phase relative to the others. It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position and adjusts the delays so that sound from each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally, Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so that all levels are equal.

MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All r ights reserved.

DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player

DLNA

, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks, service marks, or certiﬁ cation marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” and “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 04/2008 541110072038M mzh-d

Marantz AV8003 User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual